D81894GC10 Ag PDF

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
OTM 6.3 Core
@ or Guid
Competence
t
ut dent
i m
th Activity
tu Guide
a n S
ulik e this
Student
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
D81894GC10
Edition 1.0
January 2013
D84946
Copyright 2014, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You
may copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be
modified or altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share,
download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in
whole or in part without the express authorization of Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document,
please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This
document is not warranted to be error-free.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the
United States Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

The U.S. Governments rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are
s a
) ha
restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Trademark Notice
c om
c leof theire
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks
a
respective owners.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Authors i
th Stum
Julie Poindexter and Sheryl Slopey a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
Technical Contributors and Reviewers
( k aand Doug e t
Julie Poindexter, Sheryl Slopey
u tt cen s Leard
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Table of Contents
OTM 6.3 Core Competence Activity Guide ....................................................................................................1-1

Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices..............1-3
Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................1-4
Lesson 1: Course Overview ...........................................................................................................................1-5

Lesson 2: OTM Terminology ..........................................................................................................................1-6
Lesson 3: Navigating OTM .............................................................................................................................1-7
Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM ................................................................1-8
Practice 1 - Logging into OTM....................................................................................................................1-11
Solution Logging into OTM ......................................................................................................................1-13
Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help.............................................................................................1-14
Solution Navigating the OTM Online Help ...............................................................................................1-15
Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname ....................................................................................................1-16
s a
) ha
Solution Creating an OTM Nickname ......................................................................................................1-17
c om
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources .................................................................1-18
a c le e
Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data ..................................................................................................1-22
or Guid
Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM ............................................................................................1-23
t @
Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records .............................................................................1-25
ut dent
Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries ..............................................................1-28
i m
th Stu
Practice 1 - Querying for Records ..............................................................................................................1-29
a n
ulik e this
Solution Querying for Records ................................................................................................................1-30
h
Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records ....................................................................................................1-31
ik o us
t h
Solution Adding and Editing Records ......................................................................................................1-33
r
a se t
(
tt cenk
Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries ..........................................................................................................1-34
i m u
Solution Creating Saved Queries ............................................................................................................1-35
li
t h
Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences ..............................................................................................................1-36
l e
l i k an erab
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business Monitors .........................................................1-37
u nsf
Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences ...................................................................................1-39
H
rt h ik n-tra
Solution Copying and Editing User Preferences .....................................................................................1-40
a no
Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences ....................................................................................................1-41
K Solution Assigning User Preferences ......................................................................................................1-42
Lesson 6: Customizing OTM ..........................................................................................................................1-43
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus ...........................1-44
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization ....................................................................1-47
Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts. .....................................................................1-50
Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning Shipments in OTM ..................................1-51
Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM ..............................................................................................................1-52
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items ..........................................................1-53
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units ..........................................................1-55
Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items ................................................................................1-57
Solution Creating Order Releases with Line Items ..................................................................................1-60
Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses ..................................................................................................................1-61
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses......................................................................1-62
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses ............................................................................................1-63
Solution Viewing Order Release Statuses...............................................................................................1-64
Lesson 10: Planning Shipments .....................................................................................................................1-65
Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments .........................................................................1-66
Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Student Guide Table of Contents

i
Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments .........................................................................1-69
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments ................................................................................................1-71
Solution Planning Multi-stop Shipments ..................................................................................................1-72
Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments ................................................................................................................1-73
Solution Mapping Shipments...................................................................................................................1-74
Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses ..........................................................................................................1-75
Solution Viewing Order Statuses .............................................................................................................1-76

Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments ....................................................................................................1-77
Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers .............................................................................1-78
Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers ....................................................................................................1-79
Solution Changing Service Providers ......................................................................................................1-80
Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments...................................................................................................................1-81
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders .................................................1-82
Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders ....................................................................................1-84
Practice 1 - Tendering Shipments ..............................................................................................................1-85
s a
Solution Tendering Shipments ................................................................................................................1-86
) ha
c om
Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders ..................................................................................................................1-87
a c le e
Solution Accepting Tenders ....................................................................................................................1-88
or Guid
Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events ............................................................................................1-89
t @
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times ..........................1-90
ut dent
Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events ........................................................................................1-92
i m
th Stu
Solution Entering Shipment Tracking Events ..........................................................................................1-93
a n
ulik e this
Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment .....................................................................................1-94
h
Solution Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment........................................................................................1-95
ik o us
t h
Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments ..............................................................................................1-96
r
a se t
( k
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information .........................................................1-97
tt cen
i m u
Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments.............................................................................................1-98
li
h e
Solution Tracking and Tracing Shipments ...............................................................................................1-99
t l
l i k an erab
Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information .......................................................................................1-100
u nsf
Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information ..........................................................................................1-101
H
rt h ik n-tra
Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender a Multi-stop Shipment ......................1-102
a no
Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations ..........................................................................................1-103
K Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations ...........................................................................................1-104
Practice 1 - Creating Locations ..................................................................................................................1-106
Solution Creating Locations ....................................................................................................................1-108
Lesson 17: Creating Calendars ......................................................................................................................1-109
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars ..........................................................................................1-110
Practice 1 - Creating Calendars .................................................................................................................1-111
Solution Creating Calendars ...................................................................................................................1-113
Lesson 18: Creating Contacts ........................................................................................................................1-114
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts.............................................................................................1-115
Practice 1 - Creating Contacts ...................................................................................................................1-116
Solution Creating Contacts......................................................................................................................1-117
Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items ................................................................................................1-118
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities ......................................................................................1-119
Practice 1 - Creating Commodities .............................................................................................................1-120
Solution Creating Commodities ...............................................................................................................1-121
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items .................................................................1-122
Practice 2 - Creating Items .........................................................................................................................1-124

ii
Solution Creating Items ...........................................................................................................................1-126
Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles .......................................................1-127
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups .............................................................................1-128
Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups ....................................................................................................1-129
Solution Creating Equipment Groups ......................................................................................................1-130
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles ..................................................................1-131
Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles.........................................................................................1-132

Solution Creating Equipment Group Profiles ...........................................................................................1-133
Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles .......................................................................................1-134
Solution Assigning Equipment Group Profiles .........................................................................................1-135
Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers ..........................................................................................................1-136
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers ...............................................................................1-137
Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers......................................................................................................1-139
Solution Creating Service Providers ........................................................................................................1-140
Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts...........................................................................................1-141
s a
Solution Adding Service Provider Contacts .............................................................................................1-142
) ha
c om
Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details ................................................................................1-143
a c le e
Solution Adding Service Provider Contact Details ...................................................................................1-146
or Guid
Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification ..................................................................................................1-147
t @
Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification .......................................................................1-148
ut dent
Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification ..............................................................................................1-149
i m
th Stu
Solution Configuring Contact Notification ................................................................................................1-150
a n
ulik e this
Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents ...................................................................................................1-151
h
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Automation Agents .............................................................................1-152
ik o us
t h
Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents ...................................................................................................1-153
r
a se t
( k
Solution Creating an Automation Agent ..................................................................................................1-154
tt cen
i m u
Lesson 24: Contract Management .................................................................................................................1-155
li
h e
Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance ...........................................................................................................1-156
t l
l i k an erab
Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Rate Distances ..............................................................................1-157
u nsf
Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service .............................................................................................................1-159
H
rt h ik n-tra
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services ....................................................................................1-160
a no
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload .....................................................................................1-163
K Solution Creating Rate Services for Truckload........................................................................................1-164
Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .........................................................................................1-165
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings....................................................................................1-166
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .....................................................................................1-168
Solution Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .......................................................................................1-170
Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload ..........................................................................................1-171
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records .....................................................................................1-172
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload ......................................................................................1-174
Solution Creating Rate Records for Truckload ........................................................................................1-176
Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor.................................................................1-177
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences .........................................................1-178
Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences ................................................................................1-180
Solution Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences ..................................................................................1-181
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality.............................................................1-182
Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality ...........................................................................................................1-183
Solution Creating a Rate Quality .............................................................................................................1-184
Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality .........................................................................................................1-185

iii
Solution Assigning a Rate Quality ...........................................................................................................1-186
Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates .....................................................................................................1-187
Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates .................................................................................................1-188
Solution Querying for Truckload Rates ...................................................................................................1-189
Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than Truckload .........................................1-190
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles ........................................................................1-191
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records ...............................1-192
Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate Records ...........................................1-194
Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings...............................................................................................1-195
Solution Creating Master Rate Offerings .................................................................................................1-196
Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records ................................................................................................1-197
Solution Creating Master Rate Records ..................................................................................................1-199
Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries ......................................................................................................................1-200
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries ............................................................................................1-201
Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries .................................................................................................1-203
s a
Solution Creating Multi-stop Itineraries....................................................................................................1-204
) ha
c om
Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates ......................................................................................................1-205
a c le e
Solution Querying Route and Rates ........................................................................................................1-207
or Guid
Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases ..........................................................................................1-208
t @
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases........................................................................................1-209
ut dent
Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items ...........................................................1-211
i m
th Stu
Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items .....................................................................................1-212
a n
ulik e this
Solution Creating Order Bases with Line Items .......................................................................................1-215
h
Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases .....................................................................................................1-216
ik o us
t h
Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases .........................................................................1-217
r
a se t
( k
Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases ................................................................................................1-220
tt cen
i m u
Solution Bulk Planning Order Releases ..................................................................................................1-222
li
h e
Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops ..................................................................................................1-223
t l
l i k an erab
Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops .......................................................................................1-224
u nsf
Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops ..............................................................................................................1-225
H
rt h ik n-tra
Solution Re-sequencing Stops ................................................................................................................1-227
a no
Practice 2 - Tendering Shipments ..............................................................................................................1-228
K Solution Tendering Shipments ................................................................................................................1-229
Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider ..................................................................................1-230
Solution Declining Tender as Service Provider .......................................................................................1-231
Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner ..........................................................1-232
Solution Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner ............................................................1-234
Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status...................................................................1-235
Solution Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status .....................................................................1-236
Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment .......................................................................1-237
Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data ....................................................................................................................1-238
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations ..................................................................................1-239
Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations ........................................................................................................1-240
Solution Viewing Public Locations ...........................................................................................................1-241
Lesson 38: Viewing Items .............................................................................................................................1-242
Practice 1 - Viewing Items ..........................................................................................................................1-243
Solution Viewing Items ............................................................................................................................1-244
Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean ........................................1-245
Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean ...................................1-246

iv
Solution Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean .....................................1-247
Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One.......................................1-248
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One ...................................1-249
Solution Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One .....................................1-250
Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel ...............................................................1-251
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel ........................................1-252
Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel ........................................................................................1-254

Solution Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel...........................................................................................1-255
Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel..........................................................................................1-256
Solution Creating a Rate Record for Vessel ............................................................................................1-257
Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services ..............................................................................1-258
Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services .......................................................1-259
Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials .......................................................................................1-261
Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services .................................................................................1-263
Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record .................................................................................1-264
s a
Solution Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record ...................................................................................1-265
) ha
c om
Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final Truckload Leg .......................................1-266
a c le e
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg ............................1-267
or Guid
Solution Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg ..............................1-268
t @
Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates ...................................................................................1-269
ut dent
Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates ...............................................................................1-270
i m
th Stu
Solution Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates .................................................................................1-272
a n
ulik e this
Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries .......................................................................................................1-273
h
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary .......................................1-274
ik o us
t h
Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary ...................................................................................................1-276
r
a se t
( k
Solution Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary .....................................................................................................1-278
tt cen
i m u
Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates .....................................................................................................1-279
li
h e
Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates.................................................................................................1-280
t l
l i k an erab
Solution Querying for Route and Rates ...................................................................................................1-281
u nsf
Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules ...........................................................................................1-282
H
rt h ik n-tra
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules.......................................................................1-283
a no
Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules........................................................................................1-284
K Solution Configuring Auto Assignment Rules ..........................................................................................1-285
Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases .............................................................................................................1-286
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases ...................................................................................1-287
Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases ........................................................................................................1-289
Solution Creating Order Releases ...........................................................................................................1-291
Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail .................................................................................................................1-292
Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail ......................................................................................1-293
Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment .....................................................................................................1-295
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments ..................................................................................................1-296
Solution Planning Multi-leg Shipments ....................................................................................................1-298
Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements ..........................................................................................................1-299
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements ...............................................................................1-300
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements ......................................................................................................1-302
Solution Viewing Order Movements ........................................................................................................1-303
Lesson 52: Network Routing ..........................................................................................................................1-304
Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files ..............................................................................................................1-305
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File ............................................................................1-306

v
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File ..................................................................................1-309
Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV ...........................................................................1-311
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary .............................................................................1-312
Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data .........................................................................................1-314
Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File.........................................................................1-316
Solution Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File ...........................................................................1-317
Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File ............................................................................................1-318

Solution Editing the Corporation CSV File...............................................................................................1-319
Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File ........................................................................................1-320
Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File ...........................................................................1-322
Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File ..............................................................................1-323
Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM .......................................................................1-324
Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM ..........................................................................1-325
Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs......................................................................................1-326
Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates ..........................................................................................................1-327
s a
Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template ........................................................................1-328
) ha
c om
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template ...................................................................1-330
a c le e
Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering .........................................................1-332
or Guid
Appendix C3: Working with Templates ..........................................................................................................1-334
t @
Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips...............................................................................................1-335
ut dent
Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases .................................................................................1-337
i m
th Stu
Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips ................................................................................................1-338
a n
ulik e this
Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases to a Trip ......................................................................1-339
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

vi
Preface
Profile
Before You Begin This Course

Before you begin this course, you should be able to:

Explain the transport process of your company
Understand the basics of transportation and logistics processes
How This Course Is Organized

OTM 6.3 Core Competence is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on
exercises. Online demonstrations and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and skills
introduced.
s a
Related Publications ) ha
c om
Oracle Publications
a c le e
Title
@ orPartG uid
Number
t
utE38415-02
n t
Oracle Transportation Management Administration Guide
i m
h Stud e
Release 6.3
n t

Oracle Transportation Management Installation Guide
u l ika Release
this E38416-02
6.3 h
ik o us e
r t h
a se tGuide Release 6.3 E38417-02
Oracle Transportation Management
( k Migration
tt cTechnical n Architecture Guide E38415-02

u
Oracle Transportation Management
m l i e
Release 6.3
n t hi ble

lika sfeManagement
Oracle Transportation
u ra Branding Guide Release 6.3 E38421-02
i H
r an Management Data Management Guide E38426-02
k Transportation
Oracle
t h - t
Ka
rReleaseno6.3n
Oracle Transportation Management Integration Guide Release E38428-02
6.3
Oracle Transportation Management Kewill Flagship Parcel Rate E38429-01
Requests Integration Guide Release 6.3
Oracle Transportation Management Order Management Guide E38432-01
Release 6.3
Oracle Transportation Management Report Designers Guide E38433-01
Release 6.3
Oracle Transportation Management Application Scalability Guide E38434-02
Release 6.3
Oracle Global Trade Management Oracle E-Business Suite E38425-01
Integration Guide Release 6.3
Oracle Global Trade Management Customs Filing Integration E38424-02
Guide Release 6.3

vii
Oracle In-Memory Logistics Command Center Administration E41869-01
Guide Release 6.3
Oracle In-Memory Logistics Command Center Installation Guide E41870-01
Release 6.3
Oracle In-Memory Logistics Command Center Technical E41872-01
Architecture Guide Release 6.3

OTM, GTM, and LCC Documentation Library for all 6.3.x releases: E38437-01
6.3, 6.3.1, 6.3.2, etc.
Additional Publications
Installation ReadMe
All of the documents listed above are available from Oracle Technology Network (OTN)
at http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/index.html.
s a
Due to confidentiality reasons, the following documents are only available via the
) ha
installer or My Oracle Support in knowledge document 796594.1:
c om
Security Guide
a c le e
Data Dictionary
@ or Guid
Data Dictionary Diagrams t
ut dent
Data Dictionary ReadMe i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
Structural Changes Guide

External Programming Interface Guide h
ik o us
OAM Integration Guide r t
a se th
(
tt cen
XML Interface Changes k
i m u
XML Elements Dictionary li
t h l e
l i k an erab
XML Schemas
H u nsf
XSD ReadMe
rt h ik n-tra
FTI ODI Interfaces Guide
Ka no FTI Reference Guide
LCC Oracle Data Integrator Interfaces Guide
LCC Reference Guide

viii
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM 6.3 Core t
ut Competence
n t
i m
hGuide ud e
Activityn t S t
u l ika 1 this
i k h use
Chapter
h
art se to
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices
Chapter 1 - Page 1
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Chapter 1 - Page 2
Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided
Demonstrations and Practices
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Chapter 1 - Page 3
Objectives
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Objectives
Chapter 1 - Page 4
Lesson 1: Course Overview
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 1: Course Overview

Chapter 1 - Page 5
Lesson 2: OTM Terminology
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 2: OTM Terminology

Chapter 1 - Page 6
Lesson 3: Navigating OTM
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 3: Navigating OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 7
Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM
Logging In
To log into OTM, you need a user name and a password:
1. Open a browser.
2. Go to the URL provided by the instructor.

3. Enter your User Name.
The format of your User Name is DOMAIN.USER. You can also define nicknames for each
user.
4. Enter the Password.
5. Click Login.
At the top of the page, you can see the welcome area of OTM. This area displays the
OTM version, the user name, the user role, and links to access other areas of OTM.
s a
) ha
On the left side of the page, you can see the OTM navigation menu. The menu
provides access to all areas of OTM.
c om
) near the bottom of the menu to togglera
le emenu
thecnavigation
6. Click the collapse button (
@ o Guid
off.
t
ut dent
i m
h navigation
tthe tu menu back on.
7. Click the collapse button ( ) a second time to toggle
a n S
hofu
lik this
k
Displays what vers ion
i u s e
a t h
OTM you are using.
r t o Displays the user you are
t t (k nse logged into OTM as.
i m u lice
a n th able
H ulik nsfer
i k t r a Toggles the Welcome area on
arth non-
and off.
The main menu.

Toggles the Ask Oracle
menu on and off.
Toggles the main
menu on and off.

Chapter 1 - Page 8
8. Click the collapse button ( ) to the far right of the Ask Oracle toolbar.
9. Click the collapse button ( ) a second time to display the Ask Oracle toolbar again.
The Ask Oracle toolbar provides quick access to certain information, such as rates and
locations. Can be on or off by default based on user preferences.
10. Click the Information link at the top right.

OTM displays information such as user, version, URL, and database.
11. Close the Information window.
12. Click the Help link to access help.
Help displays the OTM online help.
13. Close the OTM online help.
14. Click the Logout icon to log out of OTM.
OTM logs you out but gives you the option to log in again. s a
15. Log back into OTM. ) ha
c om
At the top of the page, you can see a link for the Message Center. The Message Center is a
c le e
centralized message board that displays messages when specific events occur. The
a
Message Center is available at the top of the OTM page.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Using Online Help
i m
th Stu
16. In the main menu, click Help > Help.
a n
OTM displays the Oracle Transportation Management
h u lik t6.3
e hisHelp page. There are four tabs in
the left pane: Contents, Index, Search,
and specific features of OTM. rth
ikand oGlossary.
u s The Contents tab lists menu options
( k a Management
e t
t
17. In the help window, clicktShipment
u e n s > Location Manager.
im Management
Oracle Transportation
h c
li 6.3 Help displays an overview of the Location
t
n rab l e
lika the
Manager: Identification tab.
18. Scrolluthrough
H n s fetext and click on the link for Region ID.
rt h n - tra pane now displays regions information.
ikThe right-hand
K nothe Index tab.
a 19. Click
20. Enter calendar in the text field.
OTM help displays index entries starting with the word calendar.
21. Click the Search tab.
22. Enter calendar in the text field and press Enter.
OTM displays a list of those help pages containing the word calendar. You can enter
multiple words to search for. Topics with the most matches are ranked first.
23. Click the Glossary tab.
OTM displays a glossary of OTM and transportation-related terms.
24. Click the Hide Contents icon in the upper right of the help topic.
The left pane is hidden.
25. Click the Show Contents icon to display the left pane again.
The left pane is displayed.
26. Scroll down to the bottom of the left pane.
27. Click Send Us Your Comments.

Chapter 1 - Page 9
Notice the links which include:
A link to send an email to the OTM documentation team. Use this link if you have a
question or concern with this exact help topic.
A link to Oracles My Oracle Support (previously MetaLink) which you can use to enter
a service request which will be addressed by the OTM technical support staff.
A link to find the support phone number for your region.

29. On the main menu, click Shipment Management > Location Manager.
30. At the very top of the page, click Help on the top menu bar.
OTM displays the help topic specific to this page. Since search pages are very generic, a
common topic for Search Business Objects appears.
31. In the blue bar under the title, click Search by Status.
This section of the help topic displays without you having to scroll down the page. At the
s a
) ha
end of the topic is an up arrow that returns you to the top of the help topic.
om
32. Scroll down to the bottom of the help topic.
c
le e
Notice the links at the bottom of the topic. These are the same links as in the Send Us Your
Comments topic. These links are on every help topic. a c
33. Close the OTM online help. @ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
These are just some of the features offered by the OTM online help. OTM online help is
th Stu
n
very extensive. It is recommended that you refer to the help throughout the class. In a later
a
ulik e this
exercise, you will see additional examples of context-sensitive help.
h
ik o us
Creating a Nickname
r t h
aOTM asseantalternative to user ID. For example, a standard
You can use a nickname to log into ( k
tt cen However, with a nickname, you can enter the
user name is comprised ofu DOMAIN.USER.
nickname instead of h
t i m
DOMAIN.USER.
l e li
k an erand
34. Click Configuration
l i abAdministration > User Management > User Manager.
35. ClickHuSearch f
atsthe bottom of the page.
n
i k r a
-t the Users results page.
th OTModisplays
ar36. n
K n the ID.
Click
OTM displays the User page. Note the breadcrumb trail at the top of the page (under the
blue bar above the page name). This allows you to go back without using the Back button.
Note the nickname for this user. You can use this nickname each time you log into OTM.

Chapter 1 - Page 10
Practice 1 - Logging into OTM
Logging into OTM
Note: This training instance may be a different version of OTM than you are running at your site.
1. Open your browser and type in the OTM URL to access the server.
Note: The URL must be in the format of

http://<servername>:7777/GC3/glog.webserver.servlet.umt.Login. Due to issues with
Windows Server 2008, you are required to enter the entire URL shown above. To make it
easier to access this URL throughout the class, it is recommended you create a favorite in
Internet Explorer.
2. Log into OTM by entering your User Name and Password.
Important: Your instructor will provide each student with your own user name and password
that allows you access to your own OTM domain.
Note: Each student MUST have their own user name and password to a separate OTM
s a
domain. There are thirty staged domains for the Core Competence class:
) ha
CORE101.ADMIN through CORE130.ADMIN. They all use the same password of
c om
students are using one computer, you should assign one domain per computer. a c le e
CHANGEME. Assign one domain to each student with a computer in the class. If multiple
3. Click Login. @ or Guid

t
ut dent
OTM displays the OTM main page.
i m
th Stu
a n s
4. Click the Collapse button ( ) at the bottom
h uliofktheemain
thinavigation menu.
OTM hides the main menu.
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
5. Click the Collapse/Restore
u tt button c e n
again ( ) to display the menu.
m
hion thebtop l i
e menu bar.
6. Click Information
n t l
i ka thefOTM
OTM displays
u l e ra Information page.
H the software
7. Enter
a s
n version you are using:
i k t r
Karth non- Software Version
Field Enter Your Results
8. Close the OTM Information page.

9. Click the Logout link on the top menu bar.
OTM logs you out.
10. Click the Login again to OTM link.
11. Enter your User Name and Password.
12. Click Login.
OTM displays the OTM main page.
13. Click the Shipment Management menu option.
OTM displays a sub-menu.
14. Click the Location Manager sub-menu option.
OTM displays the location search page.
15. Click the Collapse arrow ( ) next to the bottom menu bar.
OTM hides the Ask Oracle toolbar.

Chapter 1 - Page 11
16. Click the Collapse arrow ( ) a second time to display the Oracle toolbar.
You will use the Oracle toolbar throughout the class.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 12
Solution Logging into OTM
You successfully logged into OTM and performed some actions.
Logging into OTM

Software Version Otmv631
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Logging into OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 13
Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help
Navigating the OTM Online Help
1. In the main menu, click Help > Help.
OTM displays the Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Help page. There are four tabs in
the left pane: Contents, Index, Search, and Glossary. The Contents tab lists menu options
and specific features of Help such as Flow Topics.

2. In the help window Contents tab, click Shipment Management > Location Manager.
OTM online help displays an overview of the Location Manager: Identification tab.
3. Scroll through the text and click on the link for Region ID.
The right-hand pane now displays regions information.
4. Click the Index tab.
5. Enter calendar in the text field.
s a
) ha
6. Click on the word calendars and the sub-entries, such as activity definitions.
c om
OTM online help only displays topics that have a keyword or sub-keyword of calendar.
a c le e
or Guid
Note: If you do not see the entire Type in the word(s) to search for: field or the check box
@
t
underneath it, you can expand the search pane by holding the mouse pointer over the pane
ut dent
i m
divider and then dragging the divider to the right once you see the double-sided arrow.
th Stu
8. Enter calendar in the text field and press Enter.
a n
h ulik e this
OTM online help displays a list of those help pages where the word calendar appears. You
can enter multiple words to search for.
r t h ik o us
9. Click the Glossary tab.
( k a se t
tt cen
OTM online help displays a glossary of OTM and transportation-related terms.
u
h i m li
10. Click Hide Contents in the upper right of the help topic.
t l e
k an erab
The left pane is hidden.
l i
H u nsf
11. Click Show Contents.
rt h ik n-tra
The left pane is displayed.
Ka no
13. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager.
OTM displays the Location Finder page; also known as a search page.
14. Click the Help link on the top menu bar.
The help topic specific to this page appears. Since search windows are very generic, a
common search topic appears.
15. In the blue bar under the title, click Search by Date.
The Search by Date section of the help topic displays without you having to scroll down the
page. At the bottom right of the topic is an up arrow that returns to the top of the topic.
Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help

Chapter 1 - Page 14
Solution Navigating the OTM Online Help
Navigating the OTM Online Help
You have successfully navigated through the OTM online help.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Navigating the OTM Online Help

Chapter 1 - Page 15
Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname
Creating an OTM Nickname
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Management > User Manager.
OTM displays the User search tab.
2. Click Search at the bottom of the page.

OTM displays the Users results page.
3. Click the ID.
OTM displays the User page.
4. Enter a Nickname. It cannot be the same as the Domain name.
Note: Enter the nickname in capital letters.
5. Click Finished.
OTM displays the results page.
s a
6. Log out of OTM.
) ha
7. Log back into OTM using your new nickname.
c om
c le e
You can use your nickname for the remainder of this class. You do not need to type
a
.ADMIN after a nickname.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname

Chapter 1 - Page 16
Solution Creating an OTM Nickname
Creating an OTM Nickname
You have successfully created an OTM nickname and used it to log into OTM.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating an OTM Nickname

Chapter 1 - Page 17
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources
Viewing How To Procedures
How To procedures are a series of HTML pages which include step-by-step procedures on how
to configure certain OTM functionality. The How To procedures are written using Oracle Tutor
Author and Oracle Tutor Publisher.
The How To procedures cover the following topics:

Outbound Multistop Scenario
Configuring BNG
EBS to OTM
E1 to OTM
1. Click Help > How To.
2. Click the link for Configuring BNG.
s a
3. Click the link for Creating a New Business Number Rule Definition.
) ha
4. Scroll down to view the steps.
c om
5. Close the How To window.
a c le e
@ or
Notes Gu
id
Viewing the OTM Documentation and Training My Oracle Support t
ut release.n t
There is an Oracle My Oracle Support note released for eachm
i OTM e
ud Management release.
hTransportation
These notes
describe the published information available for an Oraclen t S t
ka tresources
Use this document to ensure that you leverage allliexisting
u h is to learn about, install,
implement, and use OTM.
i k h use
6. Go to www.oracle.com. h
art se to
7. Click the SUPPORT link. t (k
u t clickcMy
e nOracle Support to Login.
m
hi Support.
8. Under Support Resources, l i
9. Log into My n
a t
Oracle
a b le
10. Where u k
itlisays Search
s f er Knowledge Base, enter the note number you want to view:
i H
k796594.1. r an
t h
r nothe - t
n magnifying glass to the right of the number you entered.
Ka 11. Click
12. Click the link for Oracle Transportation Management and Global Trade Management
Version 6.x Documentation and Training Resources.
You see the note.
The Oracle Transportation Management Documentation and Training Resources note contains
links to the following resources as well as details on how to access each of these resources:
Note: New documents can be added for any release so there may be additional documents.
Transfer of Information (TOI) Online Training
Oracle University Course-ware
Oracle Transportation Management Library links for different versions.
List of documents only available via the installer or this note.
EBS-OTM Integration Guide
Viewing the OTM Documentation Library

Following are some of the documents included on the Oracle Technology Network page:
Installation ReadMe

Chapter 1 - Page 18
Administration Guide
Installation Guide
Migration Guide
Technical Architecture Guide
Branding Guide
Data Management Guide

Integration Guide
Kewill Flagship Parcel Rate Requests Integration Guide
Order Management Guide
Report Designers Guide
Application Scalability Guide:
GTM Oracle E-Business Suite Integration Guide
s a
) ha
13. Still in the note, scroll down to the section with the text of The documents listed to the right
om
are included on the Oracle Technology Network page.
14. c
le e
Click the View Library link for OTM and GTM Documentation Library Release 6.3.
a c
15. Click the Documentation tab.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Note the list of available documents for the selected OTM release. In the top part of the
i m
page, the document names contain links to access the corresponding document. The
th Stu
n
section Confidential Documents lists the confidential documents and does not contain
a
ulik e this
links. You can access these documents via the My Oracle Support note or the installer. The
h
confidential documents include the following:
ik o us
Security Guide r t
a se th
Data Dictionary (
tt cenk
i m u
Data Dictionary ReadMeli
t h l e

l i k an erab
Structural Changes Guide

H u nsf
External Programming Interface Guide
rt h ik n-tra
OAM Integration Guide
Ka no
XML Interface Changes
XML Schema
There are also documents for FTI and GTM
16. Close the Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Documentation Library page.
Viewing the Transfer of Information Sessions (TOIs)

Transfer of Information (TOI) sessions provide information on how to set up and use different
features within OTM. TOIs are narrated slide presentations. There are two types: deltas and
comprehensives.
Delta: These are version specific. They cover enhancements that were added to a
specific release. Often they specify what is new or different from the previous version,
including benefits of new features from a business perspective and details on product
dependencies. They are usually released within a few months of a release. These are
not updated once they are released.
Comprehensive: These are not version specific. They are scenario-based and cover an
area of OTM. They usually cover setup and transaction. Depending on the length,

Chapter 1 - Page 19
there can be multiple parts which are designed to be taken in sequence. These are
updated periodically.
TOIs exist for OTM 5.5 GA, 5.5 CU2, 5.5 CU3, 5.5 CU4, 5.5 CU5, 6.0 GA, 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3.
Even though 5.5 TOIs may seem old, there is still value in them for features that have not
changed much since.
If you have an Oracle Support contract for OTM, then you already have access to view the OTM
TOIs.
To view a list of OTM TOIs, complete the following:
17. In the My Oracle Support note, follow the link and directions to access the TOIs.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 20
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 21
Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data

Chapter 1 - Page 22
Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM
Searching
When you click on a menu option, in most instances you are automatically taken to a search
page where you can enter criteria to run a query for an existing business object or create a new
business object, such as locations, orders, rates, or service providers. For example, when you
click on the Buy Shipments menu option, OTM displays a search page.
1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments.
OTM displays the buy shipment search page.
Each tab has text fields on which you can query. Certain fields have f, l, v, and n buttons to
their right. For these fields, you can:
f (find) Displays a search page for a certain object.
l (list) Displays a list of all records for a certain object. Also, if you enter some
characters in the field and click l, OTM displays all records beginning with those s a
characters.
) ha

c om
v (view) Displays the view page for the record you have typed into the text field.

c le e
n (new) Allows you to create a new object, if you have the authorization to do so.
a
or Guid
Conditional operators, such as begins with, ends with, not null, etc. let you further define the
@
criteria entered in that field. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
The following links are available at the bottom of the search page:
a n
ulik e this
Search Allows you to search for all records meeting the defined criteria.
h
ik o us
New Creates a new object, such as location, etc.
r t
a se th
Sort order Allows you to specify the order in which the results of your search will
display. (
tt cenk
i m u li
Actions Allow you to perform certain actions against the business object.
t h l e

l i k an erab
Export Allows you to export the query results to a spreadsheet.
u nsf
2. Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN.
H
rt h ik n-tra
When you type the first three characters of an ID, you see a listing of all possible location
Ka no
IDs that begin with those characters. This feature, called auto-complete, is enabled by a
global property called glog.ui.autocomplete.
3. Select SAN DIEGO STORE.
Once you query on a location, OTM displays the results page listing all the records that
meet the search criteria specified on the query page. Unless you specify a domain in your
query, the results include all data to which you have read and write access.
At the top of the results page, you see the following links:
New Allows you to create a new shipment.
View Displays the selected record(s) in a view-only format.
Edit Displays the original data entry fields available for editing. Certain fields
cannot be edited (for example Shipment ID). You can only edit a record if you have
the appropriate access.
Delete Deletes the record.
Actions Allow you to perform certain actions against the business object.
To the right of the Actions button, you see a drop-down list containing the following:

Chapter 1 - Page 23
Replace Current Window When selected, OTM overwrites the current window.
Always Open in New Window When selected, OTM always opens in new window.
Always Open in Same Window This option assumes there is one other window
that will always be the target window. If that window is currently open, upon
selection, OTM replaces the content of that window with what you click. If the target
window is not open, OTM opens a window with the new content.
At the bottom of the results list, you see the following links:
New Query Displays a blank search page so you can perform a different query if
the records that resulted from the original query are not what you want.
Refine Query Displays the search page with your original query field values that
you can change to refine the search.
Export Displays the selected records in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
s a
) ha
om
7. Select any two check boxes.
c
Note how OTM displays the number of selected records to the right of Selected.
le e
a c
8. Select another check box.
@ or Guid
t
Note how OTM increases the number of Selected Page and Total to 3.
ut dent
9. Scroll to the far right in the results page. i m
th Stu
Note how OTM always displays the ID column.
a n
10. ulik e this
Scroll back to the far left of the results page.
h
11. h ik o us
Click the Shipment ID heading once to sort the column in ascending order.
r t
12.
( k a se t
Click the Shipment ID heading a second time to sort the column in descending order.
13. u tt cen
To resize the Shipment ID column, move your mouse pointer over the far right-side of the
t h
column heading. i m l e li
14.
l i k an erab
When you see a || arrow similar to the one shown here, hold down the left-mouse
H u nsf
button and drag the arrow to the right.
rt h ik n-tra
When you release the mouse button, the column resizes.
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 24
Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records
Tips for Adding/Editing OTM Data
Throughout this course, you will be adding new data to OTM and editing existing data in OTM.
When creating new records in OTM, the following should be taken into account:
When adding a record, the ID of the record should not contain special characters such
as periods, commas, or ampersands. Underscores can be used.

You must go in order when completing the record and cannot skip from one tab to the
next and then back again. If you forget to input information on a previous tab,
complete the record entirely, click Finished, and then return and edit the record to add
the additional information.
Never use the browser back button when creating a new record. Data may be lost. If
there is a breadcrumb trail in the top right, you can click a link there to go back to a
previous page.
s a
When adding a record, always click Finished when the record is complete to save the
) ha
data. Otherwise data is lost.
c om
le e
Required fields are denoted by a red *. Conditional fields are denoted by a blue * and
a c
are only required if other data is present.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Some data entry grids offer the ability to have multiple entries and require you to click a
i m
Save button after each entry. Note the Save buttons do not save anything to the OTM
th Stu
n
database. You need to click Finished to save to the database.
a

ulik e this
Make sure you only click the Finished button once, as OTM will attempt to save
h
r t h ik o us
multiple records if Finished is clicked more than once.
Adding a Record ( k a se t
u tt >cLocation
e n Manager.
1. Click Shipment Management
m
hiLocations l i
OTM displaysnthe
a t a b leFinder page.
u
2. Click New f er of the page.
likat thesbottom
i H
kOTM displays
r anthe Identification tab.
t h - t
Kar3. Enter
4.
nona Location ID of DALLAS LOCATION.
Enter a Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF USA (already created).
Note how OTM suggests this value after you enter only a few characters.
5. Select OUTLETS OF USA from the auto-complete list.
6. Click v (view) to the right of the OUTLETS OF USA Corporation ID.
When you click the v button, the Corporation page is displayed so you can view the details
of OUTLETS OF USA.
7. Close the Corporation page.
8. Enter a Country Code of USA.
Note the Country Code. The country code has a red * (asterisk) in front of it which means
that it is required. You will not be able to save the location if you do not have a country code
specified.
9. Click Roles at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Roles tab.
10. Click New Location Role Profile. The Role page opens.
11. Select a Location Role of BILL TO.

Chapter 1 - Page 25
12. Click Save at the bottom of the page.
OTM returns to the Roles tab.
Remember to always click Finished to save your new record. Note the Save buttons do not
save anything to the database.
Editing a Record

14. Enter a Location ID of DALLAS.
16. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Identification tab. You can edit the information except in those fields that
are grayed out.
You cannot edit the Location ID. If you need to change it, copy the existing location, enter
the desired Location ID, and delete the original location record.
s a
17. Click the Help link on the top menu bar. ) ha
c om
The OTM online help is context sensitive. The OTM online help page displays information

about the Location Manager: Identification tab.
a c le e
@ or Guid
19. Click the Roles tab. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Roles tab. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
20. Click New Location Role Profile.
21. Select a Location Role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. h
ik o us
r t
a se t
22. Click Save at the bottom of the page. h
(
tt cen
OTM returns to the Roles tab. k
i m u li
23. At the top of the page, click Finished to save the record.
t h l e
l i k an erab
OTM displays the confirmation page.
H u nsf
r
Using
t h n - tra to view additional information about business objects. These shortcuts are
ikhas shortcuts
SmartLinks
a no
OTM
K called SmartLinks.
26. Right-click on a row in the Buy Shipments results page.
A SmartLink is an OTM menu listing shortcuts to related information for that business
object. In this example, you can see the available SmartLinks for buy shipments.
The Edit, Export, and View options appear on all SmartLink menus.
27. Close the SmartLinks menu.
Using Actions
Actions allow you to perform certain functions against a business object.
28. Select the check box to the left of a shipment.
29. Click Actions at the top of the results page.
30. Click the plus sign (+) next to Shipment Management.

Chapter 1 - Page 26
31. Click the plus sign (+) next to Tender.
You will use some of these options in the practices throughout the class.
32. Close the Actions menu.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 27
Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries
Creating and Running a Saved Query
You can create saved queries for searches that you use frequently.
2. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC.

3. Click the Address tab.
4. In the City field, enter LONDON.
You may also enter other information such as postal code or a specific sort order.
5. Click the Role tab.
6. Select a Location Role of AIRPORT.
7. Click Save on the right side of the page near the bottom.
OTM displays the Finder Save Query page.
s a
8. Enter a Query Name of LONDON AIRPORTS.
) ha
9. Click OK.
c om
c le e
OTM displays your query in the saved query list along with any other saved queries.
a
10. Click Execute Query to the right of your saved query.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
OTM displays the locations found by the search criteria you specified.
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries

Chapter 1 - Page 28
Practice 1 - Querying for Records
Querying for Records
OTM displays the Locations Finder page.
2. At the top of the page, click the Address tab.

OTM displays the address tab.
4. From the drop-down list next to City, select the conditional operator of Contains.
OTM displays the Locations results page with all locations that have a city name containing
LONDON.
6. At the top of the results page, click the Location Name header.
s a
OTM sorts your results by the location name in ascending alphabetical order.
) ha
7. Click the Location Name header a second time.
c om
a c le e
OTM sorts your results by the Location Name in descending alphabetical order.
8. In the ID column, click the LGW ID.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
OTM displays the details for location LGW. Based on your user access rights, you are only
able to view this information. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
9. Scroll down and click the plus sign next to the Location Role of AIRPORT.
h
Notice that the Location Role section is expanded.
ik o us
t h
10. Scroll up and click the minus sign next to Address.
r
a se t
( k
Notice that the Address section is now hidden.
tt cen
m u li
11. To view the section again, click the plus sign next to Address.
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
You can use this feature anywhere you see a plus or minus sign in front of a section
u nsf
header.
H
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Querying for Records

Chapter 1 - Page 29
Solution Querying for Records
You successfully queried for records in OTM.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Querying for Records

Chapter 1 - Page 30
Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records
Adding a Record
2. At the bottom of the page, click New.

OTM displays the Location Identification tab.
3. Enter a Location ID of DALLAS LOCATION.
4. Enter a Location Name of DALLAS LOCATION.
5. Enter a Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF USA (already created).
In this example, the Corporation ID already exists but you can also create a new
corporation.
6. Enter a City of DALLAS.
s a
7. Enter a Province Code of TX.
) ha
8. Enter a Postal Code of 75200.
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Roles tab. t
ut dent
11. Click New Location Role Profile. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
12. Select a Location Role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
13. Click Save at the bottom of the page. h
ik o us
OTM returns to the Roles tab. r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
14. Click Finished at the top of the page.
i m u li
OTM displays a confirmation page where you can view the location you just created, edit
t h l e
l i k an erab
the location you just created, view a log file, create a new location, modify an existing
u nsf
location, or perform an action against your new location.
H
rt h
Editing - tra
ik a nRecord
K no the confirmation page, click Edit.
a 15. From
OTM displays the Location Identification tab. You can edit the information except for
those fields that are grayed out.
16. On the top menu bar, click the Help link.
The OTM online help is context sensitive. The OTM online help page displays information
about the Location Manager: Identification tab.
18. Click v (view) to the right of the Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF USA.
When you click v (view), OTM displays the details of the corporation.
19. Close the Corporation page.
20. Click the Roles tab.
22. Select a Location Role of BILL TO.

Chapter 1 - Page 31
OTM returns to the Roles tab. Notice you now have two location roles defined for this
location, BILL TO and SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
24. You only want this location to be a BILL TO location. Click the trash can icon to the far
right of the location role SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
25. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete this location role profile.
OTM returns to the Roles tab with BILL TO as the only defined location role.
26. Click Finished, at the top of the page, to save the record.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 32
Solution Adding and Editing Records
Adding a Record
You successfully added a record in OTM.
Editing a Record
You successfully edited a record in OTM.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Adding and Editing Records

Chapter 1 - Page 33
Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries
Creating a Saved Query

3. Click the Address tab.
OTM displays the Address search tab.
5. Click the Role tab.
OTM displays the role search tab.
6. Select a Location Role of AIRPORT.
7. Click Save at the bottom right of the page.
s a
OTM displays the Save Query page.
) ha
8. Enter a Query Name of AIRPORTS.
c om
9. Click OK.
a c le e
OTM returns to the Locations Finder page.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Your new query now appears in the Saved Query drop-down list at the bottom of the page.
10. Click Execute Query at the bottom right of the page. i m
th Stu
a n
you just defined. h ulik e this
OTM displays the Locations results page containing a list of locations based on the query
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries

Chapter 1 - Page 34
Solution Creating Saved Queries
Creating a Saved Query
You successfully created a saved query in OTM.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Saved Queries

Chapter 1 - Page 35
Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 36
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business Monitors
Creating Saved Queries
To set up a Business Monitor, you first need to define the saved queries you wish to include in
the Business Monitor.
1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release.
2. Click the Saved Query ID drop-down list to see all order release saved queries.
If you do not see the queries you need, you can create them. Your Business Monitor can
include saved queries from different business objects.
Viewing a Business Monitor

Assign these queries to your Business Monitor ID.
3. Click Configuration and Administration > Preferences > Manage Business Monitors.
4. Enter a Business Monitor ID of CORECOMPETENCE. s a
5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. ) ha
6. Click the ID.
c om
a c le e
Note Refresh Interval (minutes). You can define a refresh interval that controls how
or Guid
often the active Business Monitor refreshes the values in the Number of Matching and
@
the Number of Previously Matching columns. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Note the Sequence Number. The sequence number defines in what order OTM
a n
ulik e this
displays the results of these queries in the Business Monitor.
h
Note the Query ID. The query ID represents the business object that you want to
ik o us
monitor.
r t
a se th
( k
Note the Saved Query ID. The saved query ID gets executed when you launch the
tt cen
i m u
Business Monitor or when the refresh interval expires. Make sure you choose a saved
li
t h l e
query that was created for the business object that you selected in the query ID field.

l i k an erab
Note the Screen Set ID. The screen set ID controls the display attributes of the results
H u nsf
page that appears when you click any of the results in the Business Monitor.
rt h ik n-tra
You then assign the Business Monitor to a user preference.
Ka no
Assigning User Preference
To activate your user preference, assign the user preference to a specific user.
7. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manage User Access.
8. Select a User Access Type of User Preference.
9. Enter a User ID of ADMIN.
10. Click Edit User Access at the bottom of the page.
11. Ensure that the Replace Existing User Preference With The Following check box is
selected.
12. Enter a User Preference of COREDEMO.
14. Log out of and back into OTM.
Viewing the Business Monitor

You can then see your important saved queries in one place.
15. Click the Business Monitor link at the top of the page.

Chapter 1 - Page 37
OTM displays the Business Monitor page containing your defined saved queries.
You can quickly see the number of:
Order bases which are not available for planning (ORDER BASE NO RELEASES)
Orders which are ready to be planned into shipments (ORDER RELEASE-NEW)
New shipments (SHIPMENT-NEW)
Shipments with delayed events entered against them (SHIPMENT-DELAYED)

16. Click on any number in the Number of Matching column.
OTM displays the records matching your query in the Business Monitor.
17. Close the results page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 38
Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences
Copying and Editing a User Preference
1. Click Configuration and Administration > Preferences > User Preferences.
OTM displays the user preferences results page.

3. Select the check box next to CORECOMPETENCE.
4. Click Copy User Preference.
OTM displays the User Preferences page.
5. Enter a User Preference ID of STUDENT.
6. In the Preference section, select a Name of Business Monitor.
7. Select a Value of CORECOMPETENCE.
8. Click Save to the right of the Value field.
s a
) ha
c om
10. Close the confirmation page.
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 39
Solution Copying and Editing User Preferences
You successfully copied a user preference with an ID of STUDENT and added a Business
Monitor of CORECOMPETENCE to it.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Copying and Editing User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 40
Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences
Assigning a User Preference
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manage User Access.
OTM displays the Manage User Access page.
2. Select a User Access Type of User Preference.

3. Enter a User ID of ADMIN.
4. Click Edit User Access at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the User Preference Access tab.
5. Remove the User Preference entry of CORECOMPETENCE.
6. Type STU and select STUDENT from the resulting auto-complete list.
s a
8. Log out of OTM.
) ha
c om
To have the Business Monitor display, you must log out of OTM and log back in again.

9. Log in to OTM.
a c le e
10. Click the Business Monitor link at the top of the page.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
OTM displays the Business Monitor page containing your defined saved queries. Enter the
i m
th Stu
defined Business Monitor saved queries below. You can compare these results to what you
a n
thisin Number of Matching Field
will see in the Business Monitor later in this class.
Saved Query Name hu
lik Value
ik o us e
ORDER_BASE-NO_RELEASES r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u
ORDER_RELEASE-NEW
li
t h l e
an erab
SHIPMENT-NEW
l i
u nsfk
SHIPMENT-DELAYED
H
ik n-tra
rt h
no the Business Monitor.
Ka 11. Close
Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 41
Solution Assigning User Preferences
You successfully assigned a new user preference of STUDENT to your OTM user.
Assigning a User Preference

Saved Query Name Value in Number of Matching Field
ORDER_BASE-NO_RELEASES 1
(Note: This is an order base in the
SHAREDCORE domain that will be used
for a demonstration later in the class.)
ORDER_RELEASE-NEW 0
SHIPMENT-NEW 0
SHIPMENT-DELAYED 0
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Assigning User Preferences

Chapter 1 - Page 42
Lesson 6: Customizing OTM
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 6: Customizing OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 43
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen
Sets and Menus
The instructors domain has customized copies of the screen sets, manager layouts and menus.
This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature.
In this demo, well customize a Freight Forwarding manager, in edit mode, and also view a
customized screen set (finder results page). Then well see how these are added to a custom
menu and the menu assigned to a user.
Viewing Custom Manager Layouts

You can use the Manager Layout Detail page to customize the manager layout on which you're
working. The manager you selected to customize is populated with the values from the original
manager layout you copied.
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manager Layout.
2. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO.
s a
3. Click Search. ) ha
4. Click FREIGHT_FORWARDING_EDIT.
c om
OTM displays the Manager Layout page for the custom manager layout.
a c le e
5. Click the Detail tab.
@ or Guid

t
ut dent
Note the tabs across the page. These correspond to the tabs on the Freight
Forwarding manager. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
6. Select the option button next to the INCO Terms field.
h
ik o us
OTM displays icons. With these icons, you can:
r t
a se th
Delete this field by clicking the trash can icon.
(
tt cenk
Edit the field by clicking the pencil icon.
i m u li
t h
7. Click the pencil icon to edit the field.
l e
l i k an erab
You can now do the following:
H u nsf
Hide the field by clearing the Show check box.
rt h ik n-tra
Make it a required field.
Ka no Make it read only.
Different types of fields will have different options available for edits.
8. Click the Save button.
OTM displays the Detail tab.
In this demonstration, we are going to delete all four INCO Term fields.
9. With the INCO Terms field option button selected, click the trash can icon.
10. Click OK when you see the question Are you sure you want to delete this field?.
OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the INCO Terms field is removed. It is
replaced by an Add INCO Terms button.
If you wanted to add the field back, you would click the Add INCO Terms button.
11. Select the option button next to INCO Term Location.
12. Click the trash can icon.
OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the INCO Term Location field is removed.
14. Select the option button next to Final INCO Terms.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus
Chapter 1 - Page 44
OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the Final INCO Terms field is removed.
17. Select the option button next to Final INCO Term Location.
OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the Final INCO Term Location field is
removed.
20. Click Finished.
Well see the results of deleting these fields of this later in this lesson.
Viewing Custom Screen Set Managers

A screen set defines how the search and search results pages look, similar to the way that a
manager layout configures the create/edit/view pages of a manager. s a
21. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Screen Set Manager. ) ha
22. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO. c om
23. Click Search. a c le e
24. Click FREIGHT_FORWARDING_EDIT. @ or Guid
t
ut dent
OTM displays the Screen Set manager.
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
Use this page to configure the fields that you want to appear on the Search page. You can
r t h ik o us
also rearrange the sequence of the tabs and their associated fields and you can add new
( k a se t
tabs and fields. You can also delete a tab or field.
26. Click the Results tab.
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
Use this page to configure the columns that appear on the Results page of the business
l i k an erab
object assigned to this screen set.
u nsf
27. In the Total Gross Weight row, click More.
H
rt h ik n-tra
28. Notice the Total check box is selected.
Ka no
The Total check box determines if the column is to be totaled.
The Total check box is also selected for the Total Gross Volume, Total Net Weight and
Total Net Volume rows.
29. Click Save.
OTM displays the Screen Set manager again.
30. Click the Actions tab.
Use this page to configure the actions that are available for a business object. OTM is pre-
configured to display all available actions for business objects. However, you may want to
prevent a user from performing a specific action. You can also move actions to new
positions in the hierarchy.
31. Click the SmartLinks tab.
Use this page to configure the SmartLinks that are available for a business object. OTM is
pre-configured to display all available SmartLinks for business objects. However, you may
want to prevent a user from viewing a specific SmartLink. You can also move SmartLinks to
new positions in the hierarchy.
32. Click Finished.
Well see what this looks like later in this class.
Chapter 1 - Page 45
Viewing a Customized Menu
The Menu Editor lets you control the objects that appear on the navigation menu on the left side
of the OTM home page. After you create a menu, you can assign it to a domain, user, or level
using the Access Manager. Also, note that you can assign more than one menu.
33. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Menu Manager.
35. Click Search.

36. Click CORE MENU.
The custom menu opens.
Note: It may take a while for this page to load. So please allow time for the page to open
completely.
37. Click Purchase Order.
s a
) ha
Note the icons that appear. You can move this item up or down, delete it or add to it.
38. Scroll down to the bottom of the menu.
c om
a c le e
At the bottom, you will see the folder Demo Screen Set and under that Freight
or Guid
Forwarding.
39. Click Finished.
t @
ut dent
Assigning Custom Menus to Users i m
th Stu
a n
New user menus are not available by default. Access
u l ik thbeisgranted to make them active.
must
40. Click Configuration and Administration
i k h> User
u s e
Configuration > Manage User Access.
41. Select a User Access Type of User
a h
rt Menu. to
42. Enter a User ID of ADMIN. ( k
tt cens e
u
im le li
43. Click Edit User Access.
t h
OTM displays
l i k anthe User
e r abMenu Access page.

H Note f
u thatnthes CORE MENU is selected.
rIfh
t i k
you made -any
n trachanges to the CORE MENU, you must log out and back into OTM to see the
Ka updated nomenu.
Chapter 1 - Page 46
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization
The instructors domain has customized copies of the screen sets, manager layouts and menus
for freight forwarding. This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature.
Viewing Custom Menus

First, lets view the customized menu.
1. Scroll down to near the bottom of the main menu.

2. Click Demo Screen Set.
The OTM menu displays the Demo Screen Set and Freight Forwarding menu option under
the new group of Demo Screen Set.
Lets look at the results of our customization.
Viewing Custom Manager Layout

Next, lets view customized manager layout for freight forwarding. s a
3. Scroll down to near the bottom of the main menu. ) ha
4. Click Demo Screen Set > Freight Forwarding.
c om
5. Click Search. a c le e
6. Select the check box next to DEMO2.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
7. Click Edit.
i m
th Stu
n
Note that there are no INCO terms fields. Normally they appear in the top section above
a
Order Configuration.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
View the standard (non-customized) Freight Forwarding page to see the INCO Terms fields.
( k a se t
8. Click Brokerage and Forwarding > Booking > Freight Forwarding.
9. Click Search.
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
10. Select the check box next to DEMO2.
11. Click Edit.
l i k an erab
H u nsf
Note that on this non-customized manager, you see the INCO Terms fields.
rt h ik n-tra
Ka nothe Results Page
Viewing
Next, lets review the customized results page (screen set).
12. Click Demo Screen Set > Freight Forwarding.
13. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO.
15. Scroll to the right until you see the columns Total Gross Weight, Total Gross Volume,
Total Net Weight, and Total Net Volume.
16. Select one or more Freight Forwarding IDs.
Note the Total row at the bottom of the results page and how the values in it change as you
select more records. OTM only displays totals for columns which have been configured to
do so.
Reconfiguring the Results Page

To be able to edit and save changes to results pages, you must have write access to your
screen sets and manager layouts.
17. Click on the wrench icon above the table to open the Configure Results page.

Chapter 1 - Page 47
s a
) ha
18. Under Selected, click Order Release ID.
c om
19. Click the Move Left arrow.
a c le e
20. Click Save.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Notice that the Order Release ID column no longer appears on the results page.
i m
th Stu
21. Click the wrench icon to view the Configure Results page again.
a n
h ulik e this
22. Under Selected, scroll down to locate and select Status.
r t h ik o us
23. Click the Move to Up arrow to move Status to the top of the column.
24. Click Save.
( k a se t
tt cen
Note that the Status column is now the first column in the results page and you do not need
u
to scroll to see it.
t h i m l e li
l i
Editing Recordsk anDirectly
e r ainbthe Results Page
Hube modified n f
s on the results page if you have defined them to be editable in the screen
i k
Fields can
t r a
arth non-
set.
K 25. Double-click in the Late Pickup Date column for the DEMO2 Order Release ID.
OTM displays a Late Pickup Date pop-up window. Note that the screen set must be
configured to allow editing of certain columns on the results page.
26. Enter a Late Pickup Date of next Monday.

27. Click OK.
The new Late Pickup Date appears in the results page highlighted in blue.

Chapter 1 - Page 48
28. Click the Save All Changes icon above the results page to save the newly entered value to
the database.
OTM displays the Saving page.
29. Click Close.
The other options in the inline edit toolbar are:

Undo All Changes - To undo all changes made to the results page since the last save.
Mass Update - To save many changes at once.
Configure Results Explained above.
Save Configuration To save changes to the configuration of the results page.
Print To print the results page without exporting.
Search Criteria Shows the search criteria used to return the results that were
returned. Search criteria only displays if you have entered some criteria before initiating s a
the search.
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 49
Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts.
Advanced layouts enable you view data from several areas of the system on one page. For
example, you can view order releases and shipments along with a map. Advanced layouts can
be divided into multiple sections. Each of these sections are re-sizable. You can create your
own advanced layout and configure it as you want.
Optional - Viewing a Custom Advanced Layout
The instructors domain has a customized advanced layout. This allows the instructor to
demonstrate this feature.
If you want to see (or show) the setup for the advanced layout, complete the following:
1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Advanced Layout.
3. Click Search.
4. Click ORDER RELEASES AND SHIPMENTS.
s a
) ha
OTM displays the Advanced Layout page.
5. In the Layout section, click Order Release Table.
c om
The properties pane opens on the right.
a c le e
or Guid
Note that you can define the Screen Set ID and Population Method. For Population Method,
@
t
ut dent
you could enter a saved query, such as order releases for a specific region.
Viewing Results of a Custom Advanced Layout i m
th Stu
a n
The instructors domain has a customized advanced layout added to the menu. This allows the
instructor to demonstrate this feature.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
Custom advanced layouts need to be added to your menu to be viewed.
k a se t
6. Scroll down to the bottom of the main menu.
(
u tt cen
7. Click Order Releases and Shipments.
t h i m l e li
OTM displays the Core Advanced Layout page.

l i k an erab
The map shows the routes.
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Note the order releases on the bottom left and the shipments on the bottom right.
The following icons appear in the toolbar in each section:
Ka no
Select and Add: Allows you to find other records and then add them to the advanced
layout.
Actions: Select a record in the table and then click this icon to launch the Actions
menu.
Execute Default Search: Removes all the records from the table and re-runs the finder
set's default saved query.
Refresh Selected: Refreshes the selected records in the table.
Remove Selected: Removes the selected records from the table. It does not remove
them from the database; it only affects if they are displayed on this page.
Export: If no rows are selected in the table, then the entire table is exported to an Excel
sheet. If rows are selected, you can choose to export just those rows, or all rows.
Execute: To change the saved query that is populating the data in the related table,
select one from the drop-down list then click the Execute button.
Other examples of Advanced Layouts include maps and the Decision Control Center.
Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts.

Chapter 1 - Page 50
Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning
Shipments in OTM
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning Shipments in OTM
Chapter 1 - Page 51
Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM

Chapter 1 - Page 52
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items
2. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO1.
OTM displays the Order Releases results page.
4. Click the ID.

OTM displays the Order Release tab.
Note the Order Release ID. If you leave this field blank, OTM generates an ID for you.
You define the rules for this in the business number generator.
5. Enter an Early Pickup Date of todays date.
6. Enter a Late Delivery Date of todays date plus 3 months.
Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it is
important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit s a
time.
) ha

c om
Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Locations are required fields on

the order release.
a c le e
7. Click the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE.
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Order Configuration manager. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
An order configuration determines how ship units are created on order bases and
a n
ulik e this
releases and how calculations are to be performed when an order is being built.
h
OTM ships with several default order configurations that are located in the PUBLIC
ik o us
t h
domain. These include the ones used in this class which are ONE_TO_ONE and
r
a se t
(
tt cenk
SHIP_UNITS. You can create your own order configuration if the default ones are not
sufficient for your business. Refer to the OTM online help and the OTM Order
i m u li
Management Guide for more details on order configuration.
t h l e

l i k an erab
Note the Order Base/Release Creation field which indicates whether the order release
H u nsf
will be entered with lines or with ship units. In this example, Line is selected which
rt h ik n-tra
means this order release will be entered with lines.
Ka
no In addition, this order configuration specifies to automatically create one ship unit for
the line item. This is specified in the Releasing Logic field.
Note the Ship Unit Creation field which indicates that OTM will automatically create the
ship units from the entered line items when the order release saved.
8. Close the Order Configuration page.
9. Click the Line Item tab.
To add a new line item, you can click the New Line Item button.
Note that you can add as many line items as you need.
10. Click the pencil icon to the right of Brand Name.
Note the Packaged Item ID of BASKETBALLS and the Total Package Count of 750.
When you are entering line items, the minimum data you can enter is the packaged
item you are shipping and the total package count.
You can also add information such as Weight, Volume, Package Length, Package
Width, and Package Height.
OTM returns to the Line Item tab.

Chapter 1 - Page 53
12. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page.
You can specify any constraints you want to add to your order such as a particular mode or
service provider that should be used.
13. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page.
You can specify contacts or locations with an interest in this order.

You must enter a transport planner with an involved party qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
Otherwise, OTM cannot send tender notifications to service providers.
Remember that it is only when you click Finished that OTM saves your data to the
database. Always look for a confirmation page when you create or update information.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 54
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units
1. From the confirmation page, click Modify Another. (Or navigate to Order Management >
Order Release > Order Release)

4. Click the ID.
Note the Order Release ID. If you leave this field blank, OTM generates an ID for you.
You define the rules for this in the business number generator.
Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it is s a
important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit
) ha
time.
c om
le e
Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Locations are required fields on
a c
the order release.
@ or Guid
7. Click the Order Configuration of SHIP_UNITS. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Order Configuration manager. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
h
ik o us

t h
OTM ships with several default order configurations one of which is the SHIP_UNITS
r
a se t
configuration used here.
(
tt cenk

i m u
li
t h e
will be entered with lines or with ship units. In this example, Ship Unit is selected which
l
l i k an erab
means this order release will be entered with ship units.
H u nsf
8. Close the Order Configuration page.
rt h ik n-tra
9. Click the Ship Unit tab.
Ka no
OTM displays the Ship Unit tab.
In this example, the order release is entered with ship unit information.
10. Click the pencil icon to the right of Drop Off Stop ID.
OTM can generate a Ship Unit ID for you.
OTM does not require any information, but you should enter as much information as
possible to allow OTM to select the best service provider and rate.
A transport handling unit is the type of packaging for a ship unit. It can be a 4x4 pallet,
a euro pallet, or anything else you have defined. In this example, you are shipping a
count of 12 - 4X4 pallets.
You can also add information such as gross weight per ship unit, gross volume per
ship unit, length per ship unit, width per ship unit, and height per ship unit. Net weight
per ship unit and net volume per ship unit are also available.
12. Click Line Item at the bottom of the page.
OTM creates a default line item for you. Or you can create the details for the ship unit and
the line item.

Chapter 1 - Page 55
You can specify contacts or locations with an interest in this order.
You must enter a transport planner with an involved party qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
Otherwise, OTM cannot send tender notifications to service providers.

s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 56
Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items
Creating an Order Release
You are going to create an order release containing line items.
2. Click New.
3. Enter an Order Release ID of PORTLAND-SALEM.
Note: Since there are a number of date fields on the order release, make sure you
populated the correct fields.
6. Select an Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE.
s a
7. Enter a Source Location of PORTLAND.
) ha
8. Enter a Destination Location of SALEM.
c om
9. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page.
a c le e
or Guid
Because you selected an order configuration of ONE_TO_ONE which specifies creation of
@
line items, OTM displays the Line Item tab. t
ut dent
10. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
OTM displays the Line Item page.
11. Enter a Packaged Item ID of BASKETBALLS.
h
ik o us
12. Enter a Total Package Count of 750.
r t
a se th
13. Enter a Weight of 15000 LB.(
tt cenk
m u
14. Enter a Volume of 1750 CU FT.
i li
t h l e
l i k an erab
u nsf
OTM returns to the Line Item tab of the Order Manager.
H
rt h ik n-tra
16. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page to enter a second line item.
Ka no
OTM displays the Line Item page.
17. Enter a Packaged Item ID of TENNIS BALLS.
19. Enter a Weight of 22500 LB.
OTM returns to the Line Item tab of the Order Manager.
OTM displays the Constraints tab.
OTM displays the Involved Parties tab.
24. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PLANNER.
25. Select a Communication Method of BY CONTACT.
26. Select an Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
27. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party Contact field.

Chapter 1 - Page 57
29. Enter the ID of the order release below:
Order ID
30. Click the Business Monitor link. Which query has been updated after performing this
exercise?
Saved Query Name Number of Matching
31. Close the Business Monitor page.

s a
Enter a second order release also containing line items.
) ha
c om
32. From the confirmation page, click Create Another. (Or navigate to Order Management >
Order Release > Order Release)
a c le e
@ or Guid
33. Enter an Order Release ID of PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK. t
ut dent
34. Enter an Early Pickup Date of todays date. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
h
Note: Since there are a number of date fields on the order release, make sure you
ik o us
populated the correct fields.
r t
a se th
( k
tt cen
i m u
37. Enter a Source Location of PORTLAND.
li
t h l e
38. Enter a Destination Location of TILLAMOOK.
l i k an erab
u nsf
H
rt h ik n-tra
OTM displays the Line Item tab.
a no
40. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page.
K OTM displays the Line Item page.
41. Enter a Packaged Item ID of GOLF BALLS.
48. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PLANNER.
50. Select an Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.

Chapter 1 - Page 58
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 59
Solution Creating Order Releases with Line Items
You successfully created two order releases: one with an ID of PORTLAND-SALEM and a
second with an ID of PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK.
The business monitor displays one updated query:

ORDERRELEASE_NEW 1
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Order Releases with Line Items

Chapter 1 - Page 60
Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 61
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses
4. Mark one of the check boxes.

5. Click View at the top of the page.
OTM displays the Order Release view page.
6. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top.
OTM displays the Statuses page.
Statuses tell you what has happened to this business object up until this point. This is a
new order release, so all the values are set to their default. These values change as the
business object moves through various processes in OTM.
s a
Note the Status Value of PLANNING_NEW. This indicates there are no shipments ) ha
built yet for this order release.
c om
a c le e
Note the Status Value of ORDER MODIFIED_NO MODIFICATION. This indicates
or Guid
that the order base associated with this order release is the same as when the order
@
t
ut dent
release was built. Certain automation agents can change this value when order
bases are updated.
i m
th Stu
7. Close the Statuses page.
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 62
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses
Viewing the Order Release Status

3. Mark the check box next to PORTLAND-SALEM.
6. Enter the Status Value for the Status Type listed below:
Status Status Value s a
Type ) ha
PLANNING c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 63
Solution Viewing Order Release Statuses
For the order release:
Status Status Value
Type
PLANNING PLANNING_NEW
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing Order Release Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 64
Lesson 10: Planning Shipments
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 10: Planning Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 65
Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments
Planning a Multi-stop Shipment

Based on your search criteria, OTM displays two order releases.
4. Mark both check boxes.
5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Multi-stop.
You can select other actions such as Bulk Plan Buy or Direct to let OTM decide how best
to build shipments.
You see the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page.
Note the View Diagnostics button. This button is not available by default, but it can be
s a
) ha
added by selecting Diagnostic Log in the user preferences.
c om
6. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the View Diagnostics button.
OTM displays the Diagnostics Log Viewer.
a c le e
or Guid
The Diagnostic Log Viewer page opens and displays process steps, entities, duration
@
t
ut dent
and status, so you can see the sequence of events and whether they were successful.
i m
Two of the statuses are Success and Failure. Remember that these are process
th Stu
n
statuses and Success may not always be good nor may Failure always be bad. For
a
h ulik e this
example, the message may be Success for bundling orders but you may not want them
bundled.
r t h ik o us

a se t
Processes vary depending on the process performed. For example, for building
( k
tt cen
shipments, some of the processes you will see are: identify valid itineraries, multi-stop
u
t h m l e li
merge shipments, and commit shipments.
i

l i k an erab
If there is a plus button, you can click on it to view sub-process steps.
u nsf
7. Scroll down and note the Process Step of Multi Stop Merge Shipments.
H
rt h ik n-tra
The status of this process steps indicates that the number of shipments to merge is 2
Ka no and that using the Concurrent Savings Merge algorithm that these shipments have
been combined into 1 shipment.
8. Click the plus button next to Multi Stop Merge Shipments.
Note that several new entries appear under Multi Stop Merge Shipments.
You see the details for the Multi Stop stats process.
And finally you see the Commit Shipments process completed successfully. This
indicates that the shipment was successfully saved to the database.
9. Close the Diagnostics Log Viewer page.
10. Click the Shipment ID on the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page.
OTM displays the Buy Shipment view page.
OTM generates the shipment ID using rules defined in the business number generator.
Note the service provider and transport mode for the shipment.
Note the Number Of Orders and Number Of Stops. There were two orders, DEMO1 and
DEMO2 planned into this single multi-stop shipment. The shipment has three stops.
11. Click the plus sign next to More.
OTM displays additional shipment information including:

Chapter 1 - Page 66
Cost information for the shipment such as Total Actual Cost, Total Weighted Cost, and
Planned Cost.
Start Time and End Time for the shipment. OTM calculates the time window identifying
the earliest, best, and latest start time and end time for a shipment.
Parameter Set ID used for planning the shipment.

Itinerary used to build the shipment.

Utilization bars for the weight and volume.
12. Click the Parameter Set ID of DEFAULT.
OTM displays the Parameter Set page.
This is the default planning parameter set that is delivered with OTM.
Parameter sets are used to control the way OTM builds and modifies shipments. They can
be specified from some action pages or they can be set to default values based on either
user preferences or domain settings.
s a
) ha
To set them at the domain level via domain settings, you can go to Configuration and
Administration > Domain Management > Domain Settings.
13. Close the Parameter Set page. c om
a c le e
or Guid
14. Click the shipment ID to view the shipment again.
15. t @
Scroll down and click the plus sign next to the Shipment Equipment ID.
ut dent
i m
OTM displays more details about the equipment used for this shipment including total
th Stu
weight, total volume, and ship unit data.
a n
16.
ulik e this
Scroll down to the bottom of the Buy Shipment view page.
h
r t h ik o us
OTM displays shipment stop information including all stops included in the shipment. For
( k a se t
each stop, you can see the stop type, location, and planned arrival and departure
information.
u tt cen
17. i m li
Click the plus sign next to Standard Documents.
t h l e
l i k an erab
This section contains standard documents associated with the shipment. A standard
u nsf
document is an assignment of a document type to a transaction, such as a shipment.
H
rt h ik n-tra
Revisions are kept of standard documents.
no
Refer to the OTM Transfer of Information session titled 6.3 TOI OTM Document
Ka Management Functional Overview for more information on document set up, generation,
and flow.
18. Click the plus sign next to Additional Documents.
This section displays document uploads and reports directly associated with the shipment
by a user or through integration. Documents can be associated with the shipment through
the Attach Document or the Upload Document actions. Ad hoc documents are documents
without a document type that are associated with the shipment.
Viewing Diagnostics Log Files from OTM Menus

If you close the shipment confirmation page and want to go back at a later time and view a
diagnostic log file, you can do this via the Process Management menus.
19. Go to Operational Planning > Process Management > Diagnostics > View
Diagnostics.
20. Click f (find) next to the Diagnostic Log File ID field.
OTM displays the Diagnostic Log File Finder page.
21. Enter a Start Time of todays date.

Chapter 1 - Page 67
22. Click Search.
OTM displays the Diagnostic Log File search results page.
23. Select a log file to view.
In this example, there is only one file listed and it is selected by default.
24. Click Finish at the top of the page.
OTM displays the View Diagnostics process management page with the ID you selected.
25. Click View Results to view the diagnostic log file.
OTM displays the diagnostic log for the shipment you created earlier in this demonstration.
26. Close the Diagnostic Log Viewer page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 68
Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments
Mapping Your Shipment
1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map
Shipments.
Click the Legend icon to

view or hide the legend.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
You can zoom in and out
and maneuver the map. i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
m
You can isee
utt licenat the bottom of the
a n thYou canaalsobselect
page. le and run saved queries.
shipment information
H ulik nsfer
rt h ik n-tra
K 3.
no in as necessary.
a 2. Zoom
Click the Legend icon located in the right side of the icon bar.
OTM displays the Legend.
For more information about the icons listed in the legend, please refer to the OTM
online help topic glog.map Properties.
4. Close the Map Shipments page.
5. Close the Buy Shipment view page.
6. Close the Build_Buy_Shipment page.
Viewing the Order Status

10. Mark the check box next to DEMO1.

Chapter 1 - Page 69
The status value of PLANNING_PLANNED - FINAL indicates this order release has been
successfully planned onto a shipment.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 70
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments

3. Mark the check box next to both the PORTLAND-SALEM and PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK
order releases.
4. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Multi-stop.
OTM displays the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page.
5. If you see the Ignore the Following Constraints page, make sure that nothing is selected
and click OK.
6. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the View Diagnostics button.
s a
) ha
7. Enter the status information for the following process step:
Process Step om
Enter the Status
c
Identify Valid
a c le e
Itineraries
@ or Guid
8. Close the Diagnostic Log Viewer page.
t
ut dent
i m
th Shipment
tu ID.
9. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the
OTM displays the Buy Shipment page in viewlimode. a n
k this S
h u e
h i k u s
art sebelow:
11. Enter the following shipment information
( k to
Field utt e n Enter Your Results
m
hIDi ble l i c
n
Shipment t
u lika Provider
Service s f era
i k H ID ran
arth nonTotal -t Actual Cost
K
Rate Offering
Rate Record
Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 71
Solution Planning Multi-stop Shipments
You successfully viewed the diagnostics log and saw the following information:
Process Step Enter Your Results
Identify Valid Success

Itineraries Found 1 Itineraries.
itinerary 1: SHAREDCORE.OR MULTISTOP
You successfully created a multi-stop shipment with the following information:

Shipment ID 01000 s a
Service Provider FGN9 ) ha
ID
c om
a c le e
or Guid
Total Actual Cost 605.00 USD
Rate Offering ID FGN9 TL t @
ut dent
Rate Record ID FGN9 OR i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Planning Multi-stop Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 72
Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments
Mapping Shipments
1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map
Shipments.
2. Zoom in as necessary.
Click the Legend icon to

view or hide the legend.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
You can zoom in and out
a n
ulik e this
and maneuver the map.
h
ik o us
r t
a se t h
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h
n can seershipmentl e
l i k aYou
f e ab information at the bottom of the
Hu rans
page. You can also select and run saved queries.
i k t
Karth non-
3. Click the Legend icon in the toolbar at the top of the map.
OTM displays the Legend.
4. Close the Map view page.
5. Close the Shipment View page.
6. Close the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page.
7. Click Business Monitor link at the top of the page. Which query has been updated after
performing this exercise?
Saved Query Name Number of Matchings
Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 73
Solution Mapping Shipments
Mapping Shipments
You successfully mapped your shipment in OTM.
The business monitor displays one updated query:

SHIPMENT-NEW 1
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Mapping Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 74
Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses

3. Mark the check box next to PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK.
5. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. Enter the status value for the status
type listed below:
Status Type Status Value
PLANNING s a
) ha
om
c
le e
a c
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 75
Solution Viewing Order Statuses
Your status is as follows:
PLANNING PLANNING_PLANNED FINAL
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing Order Statuses

Chapter 1 - Page 76
Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 77
Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers
Changing Service Provider
2. Click the Order Release tab.

OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page.
5. Mark the check box next to the ID.
6. Click Actions > Shipment Management.
Note the different options under Shipment Management. You can change details such as
service provider, costs, and stops.
7. Click Change Service Provider > Change Service Provider.
s a
OTM displays valid service provider options for the chosen shipment.
) ha
Note the following check boxes at the top of the page:
c om

c le e
The Allow Alternate Equipment check box allows you to change the equipment to a
a
or Guid
different valid available piece of equipment, if one is available.
@
t
ut dent
Use the Allow Alternate Mode check box to change to a valid alternate transport
mode. i m
th Stu
a n
Use the Allow Infeasible Service Time check box to allow service times to be early
h ulik e this
or late for order pickups and drop offs. There must still be a valid time window.
h ik o us
In the Rate Preferences drop-down, you can specify whether to use preferred rates or not.
r t
( k a se t
We will discuss preferred rates later in this class.
u tt cen
Note the Status. If a service provider can be used for this shipment, it has a status of
t h i m l e li
Available. The service provider currently assigned to the shipment has a status of Available
(Current).
l i k an erab
u nsf
In the grid, you see shipment details such as rate offering, cost, start and end time for each
H
rt h ik n-tra
service provider.
Ka no
8. If you change any of these options, click the Refresh button to update the grid.
9. Note the Analyze Carrier Scorecard button. This button can only be used if Oracle Fusion
Transportation Intelligence (FTI) is installed. FTI is not installed on the training server, so
this button will not work.
10. Mark the option button next to the Service Provider ID NW99.
11. Click OK.
OTM displays the shipment data for the new service provider.
Note the service provider has been changed from FGN9 to NW99.
12. Click the Shipment ID.
Note the Total Actual Cost is different from the Planned Cost. The planned cost is the
original OTM calculated cost of the shipment and does not change. The total actual cost
reflects the current service provider and associated rates.
15. Close the Change Service Provider page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers

Chapter 1 - Page 78
Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers
You just found out that the Forest Green Trucking drivers went on strike this morning. You need
to manually change the service provider on the shipment you just created.
Changing the Service Provider


3. Mark the check box next to the shipment you just created.
4. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Service Provider > Change Service
Provider.
OTM displays the Service Providers page. OTM displays all available service providers
along with the shipment information if you were to select that service provider.
s a
) ha
Note that the Available service provider of FGN9 is the current service provider.
om
5. Mark the option button next to the Service Provider ID of NW99.
6. Click OK. c
le e
a c
OTM displays the shipment data after the service provider change.
@ or Guid
7. Click the shipment ID to view additional shipment data. t
ut dent
8. Click the plus sign next to More. i m
th Stu
9. Enter the following shipment information below:
a n
ulik Enter is Results
thYour
Field
h
ik o us e
Service Provider ID r
a se tt h
Total Actual Costtt ( k n
m u l i c e
t
Rate Offering
n hi ble
u likaRecord
Rate
s f era
i k H Planned
r an Service
t h - t
Kar nonProvider
Planned Cost
Planned Rate
Offering
Planned Rate
Record
11. Close the Change Service Provider page.
Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers

Chapter 1 - Page 79
Solution Changing Service Providers
Changing the Service Provider
Note the following data on the shipment after the service provider has been changed:
Service Provider ID NW99

Rate Offering NW99 TL
Rate Record NW99 OR
Planned Service FGN9
Provider
s a
) ha
Planned Cost 605.00 USD
Planned Rate
Offering
FGN9 TL
c om
a c le e
Planned Rate FGN9 OR
@ or Guid
Record t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Changing Service Providers

Chapter 1 - Page 80
Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 81
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting
Tenders
Viewing the Shipment Status

s a
OTM displays the Statuses page. ) ha
Note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_NOT STARTED. This indicates
c om
the shipment has not yet been tendered.
a c le e
Note the status value of REVIEWED_NOT REVIEWED. This indicates the
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
shipment has been planned but has not been approved for execution.
8. Close the Statuses page. i m
th Stu
a n
Tendering Your Shipment
h ulik e this
9. From the Shipment View page, click Actions
r t h ik o >uShipment
s Management > Tender >
Secure Resources. a se
(kaction t
Using the Secure Resources
u t t e ntriggers the one-step tendering process.
i m
hTender l i c
Note the Analyze
a n t
Fusion Transportation a b le (FTI) is installed. FTI is not installed on the training
Performance button. This button can only be used if Oracle
Intelligence
server,
H s ferwill not work.
ulsoikthisnbutton
10. ik
t h n - raon the Secure Resources page.
Click the tID
r
a OTM nodisplays the Shipment View page.
K 11. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top.
Note the status value of REVIEWED_EXECUTE. This indicates the shipment is reviewed
and may be executed. Also note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED
which indicates the shipment has now been tendered to the service provider.
14. Close the Secure Resources page.
Accepting Your Tender

15. From the Buy Shipment view page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender.
The carrier can log into OTM, in their own domain, to respond to your tender. You, as a
transport planner, can also do it for them. For example, you might call them to get a
quick reply and then update OTM.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 82
If, for some reason, the carrier does not receive your tender notification, you can send
it again with the Re-Transmit Tender action. In this example, you are accepting the
tender for the service provider.
16. Click Accept Tender.
OTM displays the Accept This Shipment page.
17. On the Accept this Shipment Page, note the following:
Note the Pickup Date Time near the bottom of the page.
You can enter reference numbers and remarks.
18. Click Finished at the bottom of the page to accept the tender.
19. Close the Results page.
20. In the navigation trail at the top of the page, click the Buy Shipments Result link.
OTM displays the Buy Shipments finder results.
21. Click the ID of the shipment for which you just accepted the tender.
s a
) ha
c om
c le e
Note the status value of REVIEWED_EXECUTE which indicates the shipment is reviewed
a
or Guid
and may be executed. Also note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED
@
t
ut dent
which indicates the shipment has now been accepted by the service provider.
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 83
Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders
Tendering Your Shipment

6. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Open Tender.
You can send, modify, re-transmit, or withdraw your broadcast tender and/or spot bid
tender.
7. Click Broadcast Tender.
s a
OTM only displays service providers that support broadcast tendering and are valid for
) ha
this shipment.
c om
le e
The default response time is the latest response time of all service providers. You can
a c
override the default using the Expected Response Time.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
You can also add a Service Provider ID if one is not included in the list.
i m
th Stu
Once you click Submit, OTM sets the status value on the shipment to SECURE
RESOURCES_TENDER RESPONSE OPEN.
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 84
Practice 1 - Tendering Shipments
Viewing Shipment Status

3. Mark the check box next to the shipment you just created.
OTM displays the Buy Shipment page in view mode.
6. Enter the shipment status values for the status types listed below:
Status Type Status Value s a
) ha
om
REVIEWED
SECURE RESOURCES c
le e
a c
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Tendering a Shipment i m
th Management
tu > Tender > Secure
8. From the Buy Shipment page, click Actions > Shipment a n S
Resources.
h ulik e this
9. On the Secure Resources page, clickik u s ID to view additional shipment data.
the shipment
r t h
a viewspage. t o
OTM displays the Buy Shipment
tside( k
t of the e
npage near the top.
m u
10. Click Status on the right
l i c e
t
OTM displays the
n hiStatuses
b l epage.
l a sfestatus
11. Enter theikshipment
u ra values for the status types listed below:
i k H raStatus n Type Status Value
t h - t
Kar nonREVIEWED
SECURE RESOURCES

14. Close the Secure Resources page.

Chapter 1 - Page 85
Solution Tendering Shipments
Viewing Shipment Status
Your status is as follows:
REVIEWED REVIEWED_NOT REVIEWED

SECURE RESOURCES SECURE RESOURCES_NOT STARTED
Tendering a Shipment
Once you tender the shipment, your status is as follows:
s a
REVIEWED REVIEWED_EXECUTE
) ha
SECURE RESOURCES SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Chapter 1 - Page 86
Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders
Accepting a Tender
1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender >
Accept Tender.
2. Click Finished at the bottom of the Accept This Shipment page.
3. Close the Results page.

4. In the navigation trail at the top of the shipment page, click the Buy Shipments Result link.
5. Click the shipment ID for which you just accepted the tender.
7. Enter the shipment status value for the status type listed below:
s a
Status Type Status Value ) ha
REVIEWED c om
a c le e
SECURE
@ or Guid
RESOURCES
t
ut dent
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 87
Solution Accepting Tenders
Accepting a Tender
Once you accept the tender for the service provider, your status is as follows:
REVIEWED REVIEWED_EXECUTE
SECURE SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED
RESOURCES
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Accepting Tenders

Chapter 1 - Page 88
Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Chapter 1 - Page 89
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and
Viewing Stop Times
Responsibility: Service Provider
In this demonstration, you are logging into OTM as a service provider.
Entering Shipment Tracking Events

1. Login to OTM as SERVPROV.SHAREDCORE-NW99 using password CHANGEME.
2. Click Buy Shipment Events.
3. Enter a Shipment Reference Number of YOURDOMAIN. For example, COREDEMO.
4. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of GLOG.
s a
) ha
6. Click the ID. If there is more than one shipment, click the ID of the shipment with the
om
highest sequential number.
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page. c
le e
a c
7. Click Add Shipment Tracking Event at the bottom of the page.
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Event page. t
ut dent
8. Select a Responsible Party of Carrier. i m
th Stu
a n
The Responsible Party describes the person that has entered the event. The values that
h ulik e this
appear in this field are determined by the Responsible Party Profile that is assigned to this
action using the Audit Action page.
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
By default, Oracle Transportation Management provides a Responsible Party Profile of
tt cen
Carrier with a Responsible Party of Carrier that is pre-configured with all available public
u
t h m l e li
status and reason codes. Once you select a Responsible Party, the Status and Reason
i
an erab
fields will have specific values to choose from.
l i
u nsfk
9. Select a Status of Delayed and Shipment Delayed.
H
ik n-tra
This indicates what has happened.
rt h
a no
10. Select a Reason of Driver Related and Driver Related.
K This indicates why it has happened.
11. Note the Shipment ID is the same as the shipment ID link that you selected on the Buy
Shipments page in step 6.
12. Select a Shipment Stop of 2. SALEM, OR, USA.
This indicates where it has happened.
13. Enter an Event Date/Time of Todays Date at 23:30 (11:30PM).
This indicates when it has happened.
OTM displays the Results page.
16. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page.
17. Note your newly added event in the Shipment Tracking Event History section.
18. Log out of the SERVPROV domain.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times
Chapter 1 - Page 90
Responsibility: Transport Planner
Log into your domain to see how the shipment tracking event you added impacted the shipment
stop times.
Viewing Updated Arrival and Departure Times

19. Log back in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. For example, COREDEMO.ADMIN.
24. Click the ID of the shipment with the highest sequential number.
OTM displays the Identification tab.
s a
) ha
25. Click the Stops tab.
om
OTM displays the Stops tab.
c
le e
26. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop for Salem where the delayed event
occurred. a c
OTM displays the Shipment Stops page. @ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
27. Compare the Planned Arrival Time, Estimated Arrival Time, and Actual Arrival Time fields.
th Stu
n
Planned times always remain as originally calculated.
a
h ulik e this
The actual arrival time is the time you entered on the shipment tracking event.
r t h ik o us
OTM updates downstream estimated times based on the actual arrival time but does
k a se t
not change upstream estimated times. In this example, the estimated departure time on
(
tt cen
stop 2 and the estimated arrival/departure times on stop 3 are updated.
u
h i m li
t l e
k an erab
OTM returns to the Stops tab.
l i
H u nsf
29. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the third stop for Tillamook.
rt h ik n-tra
OTM displays the Shipment Stops page.
Ka no
30. Compare the Planned Arrival Time, Estimated Arrival Time, Planned Departure Time, and
Estimated Departure Time.
Note the planned times have not changed but the estimated times have been updated
based on the shipment tracking event entered on the previous stop.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times
Chapter 1 - Page 91
Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events
In this practice, you will act as Northwest Truck Lines and add a shipment tracking event of
shipment delayed to the multi-stop TL shipment.
Entering a Shipment Tracking Event

1. Ensure only one OTM window is open.
2. Log out of OTM if necessary.

3. Login to OTM as SERVPROV.SHAREDCORE-NW99 using password CHANGEME.
4. Click Buy Shipment Events.
5. Enter a Shipment Reference Number of YOURDOMAIN. For example, CORE102.
6. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of GLOG.
OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page containing all buy shipments with a service
s a
) ha
provider of NW99.
8. Click the ID.
c om
a c le e
9. Click Add Shipment Tracking Event at the bottom of the page.
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Event page. t
ut dent
10. Select a Responsible Party of Carrier. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
11. Select a Status of Delayed and Shipment Delayed.
h
12. Select a Reason of Driver Related and Driver Related.
ik o us
t h
13. Select a Shipment Stop of 2. SALEM, OR, USA.
r
a se t
( k
14. Enter an Event Date/Time of Todays Date at 23:30 (11:30PM).
tt cen
m u li
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
OTM displays the Results page.
u nsf
H
rt h ik n-tra
17. Click the ID.
Ka no
Note your newly added event in the Shipment Tracking Event History section.
18. Log out of the SERVPROV domain.
19. Log back in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. For example CORE102.ADMIN.
20. Click Business Monitor link at the top of the page. Which query has been updated after
performing this exercise?
Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Chapter 1 - Page 92
Solution Entering Shipment Tracking Events
Entering a Shipment Tracking Event
Once you enter the shipment tracking event and check your business monitor, the following
saved query is updated.

SHIPMENT-DELAYED 1
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Chapter 1 - Page 93
Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment
In this practice, you will act as a transport planner for BestFoods Corporation in Portland and
find out how this delay affects your shipment.
Viewing the Updated Arrival and Departure Times


3. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Stops tab.
5. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop for Salem where the delayed event
s a
) ha
was entered.
OTM displays the Shipment Stops page.
c om
6. Compare the planned times, estimated times, and actual times for stop 2 (Salem).
a c le e
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time
@ or G
Actual uidTime
Arrival
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu Actual Departure
Planned Departure n
Estimated Departure
a
Time
h ulikTimee this Time
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u ttof the cpage.
e n
7. Click Save at the bottom
OTM returns n
m
hi Stopsbltab.
totthe e l i
a
lik(the pencil a
er icon) next to the third stop for Tillamook.
8. Click Edit
H u s f
h i kOTM displays
- t r anthe Shipment Stops page.
t
K non the planned times, estimated times, and actual times for stop 3 (Tillamook). Note
ar9. Compare
how the estimated times have been updated based on the event entered for stop 2
Salem.
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time Actual Arrival Time
Planned Departure Estimated Departure Actual Departure

Time Time Time
Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment

Chapter 1 - Page 94
Solution Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment
Viewing the Updated Arrival and Departure Times
Your stop times are updated for stop 2 (Salem) as follows:
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time Actual Arrival Time
Same Same Date/time of shipment

event
Planned Departure Estimated Departure Actual Departure
Time Time Time
Same Date/time of actual arrival Empty
time on stop 2 plus 30
minutes activity time
s a
) ha
Your stop times are updated for stop 3 (Tillamook) as follows: c om
a c le eTime
Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time r
Actual
o i
Arrival
u d
Same Date/time of estimated t t
u den @
Empty t G
h
departure time on stop i m 2
plus transit timenoft 1 hourStu
a
h ulik e this
40 minutes
Planned Departure
r t h ikEstimated
o usDeparture Actual Departure
Time
( k a se t Time Time
Same u tt ceDate/time
n of estimated Empty
i m l i
a n th able arrival time on stop 3 plus
l i k f e r 30 minutes activity time
i k Hu rans
t
Karth non-
Solution Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment

Chapter 1 - Page 95
Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 96
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information
Track and Trace Shipments
Track and trace displays order or shipment information. In this example, you are going to view
shipment information.
1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Shipment Visibility.

OTM displays the Shipment Visibility page.
5. Right-click on the Shipment ID and select Track and Trace from the SmartLinks menu.
Note the shipment Trace and Trace page displays information such as source and
destination locations, service provider, planned and actual dates, equipment, and shipment
s a
) ha
event history.
om
6. Scroll down to the Reference Numbers section.
7. Note the reference number with a qualifier of BM for this shipment. c
le e
a c
@ or Guid
Reference Number = BM t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e tabouthis their shipments in transit.
Public Tracking
Public tracking enables your customers to gethinformation

ik dataoorushipment
s
Customers can search by reference number
r t h t
ID. In this example, you will
search for shipments using a specific
t t (ka> Visibility
n se > Public Tracking.
reference number.
im u c e
liNumber
9. Select a Shipment
n t h l
Reference
b e Qualifier of BM.
a erReference
10. Enter theikShipment
l a Number you copied above.
u
H Search
11. Click s f
nat the bottom of the page.
i k t r a
Karth OTMnon
- the Public Tracking page.
displays
The Public Tracking page displays scheduled arrival and departure information,
reference numbers, and freight details.
Note in the Freight Movement section, you can see this shipment is delayed.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information

Chapter 1 - Page 97
Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments
In this practice, you will track and trace your shipment and view shipment tracking event
information for your multi-stop TL shipment.
Tracking and Tracing a Shipment

1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Shipment Visibility.
2. Click Search.
OTM displays the Shipment Visibility results page.
3. On the shipment you just created, right-click and select Track and Trace from the
SmartLinks menu.
4. Note the reference number with a qualifier of BM (i.e. bill of lading number) for this
shipment.
s a
Reference Number = BM
) ha
c om
Viewing the Shipment Event
a c le e
or Guid
5. In the breadcrumb trail, click the Shipment Visibility Result link.
@
6. Mark the check box next to the shipment you just created. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
7. Click Actions > Events > View Shipment Tracking Events.
a n
ulik e this
h
8. Enter the shipment event information below.
ik o uEnter
s This Value
Field r t h t
Event Descriptiontt (
ka nse
i m u lice
a n th able
Event Location
uEvent s f er
lik Date/Time
9. ik
H an Tracking Events page.
Close thetrShipment
t h
ar non -
K
Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 98
Solution Tracking and Tracing Shipments
Track and Trace a Shipment
The bill of lading, or BM, reference number is as follows:
Reference Number = BM NW99-000001 (It can vary if many shipments

were built before.)
Viewing the Shipment Event

Your shipment tracking event information is as follows:
Field Enter This Value
Event Description SHIPMENT DELAYED
s a
) ha
Event Location 2. SHAREDCORE.SALEM, OR, USA
Event Date/Time Todays date and a time of 23:30
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Tracking and Tracing Shipments

Chapter 1 - Page 99
Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information
Viewing Public Tracking Information
You will search for shipments using a specific reference number.
1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Public Tracking.
2. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of BM.

3. Enter the Shipment Reference Number Value you noted in the previous practice. Note:
this is the reference number value with a reference number qualifier of BM.
OTM displays the Public Tracking results page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information

Chapter 1 - Page 100
Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information
Viewing Public Tracking Information
You can see tracking information about your shipment.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information

Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender
a Multi-stop Shipment
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender a Multi-stop Shipment
Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations
Creating a Location
When creating a location, you should enter as much information as possible. This enables OTM
to better plan your orders into shipments.
2. Enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC.

OTM displays the Locations results page.
4. Click the ID.
Note the Location ID is grayed out when editing. Once a business object is created in
OTM, the ID cannot be changed. The only way to change an ID is to copy the object,
enter the new ID, and delete the old object. For each domain, the ID must be unique.
Your company may create a naming scheme to control IDs. s a
Note the Location Name. The name makes it easier to find an object if the ID is cryptic. ) ha
c om
Note the Corporation ID. Each location must be assigned to a corporation.
a c le e
@ or Guid
Note the address information. OTM can populate the values for latitude and longitude
based on known combinations of city, state/province, postal code, and country.

t
ut dent
i m
It is possible to have OTM verify part of your address information against data you
th Stu
n
know is correct. For example, OTM can prevent you from saving a location if the postal
a
ulik e this
code, city, and country are an unknown combination.
5. Click the Roles tab. h
ik o us
r t
a se th
Location roles are used to identify the function of a location.
(
tt cenk
The Roles tab allows you to enter multiple location roles for a location. Data on this tab
i m u li
may be used by OTM to calculate distance values and rates.
t h l e
l i k an erab
6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role.
u nsf
Depending on the location role selected, different fields may appear on this page. If you
H
rt h ik n-tra
select a location role of XDOCK, you will see this page looks different than for a location
no
role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO.
Ka 7. Click the Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 1H.
On the Activity Time Definition page, you can set a fixed stop time and variable stop time. If
you have specified both a fixed and variable stop time, OTM adds them together.
Fixed stop time identifies a set period of time. In this example, the Fixed Stop Time is 1
H (hours).
Variable stop time is in terms of time per weight, volume, ship units, etc.
8. Close the Activity Time Definition page.
10. Click the Routing tab.
Note the Location Classification. Some rates may differ between residential and
commercial locations.
Note the Service Provider Profile. You can exclude certain carriers from being used for
a location or enforce the use of certain carriers for this location. For example, a location
has asked that a specific carrier is always used for their location.

Note the Equipment Group Profile. You can define use, or non-use, of certain types of
equipment for this location. For example, a particular loading dock may not be able to
handle 53ft equipment.
Note the Substitute Location ID. You can define another location where shipments
should be picked up or delivered instead of at this location. For example, for the next
few weeks, you want to use an alternate location instead of picking up at the usual
location.
Note the Operational Locations section. When transporting goods to/from ports,
airports, or rail ramps, there can be different points within them that goods are
delivered to or picked up from. You can have multiple operational locations associated
with a location.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Creating Locations
In addition to creating a source location, you are also going to create the corporation to which
the location is assigned.
Creating a Source Location

2. Click New.
4. Enter a Location Name of PHOENIX DC.
5. Click n (new) next to Corporation ID.
OTM displays the Corporation manager.
6. Enter a Corporation ID of PHOENIX CORP.
s a
7. Enter a Corporation Name of PHOENIX CORPORATION.
) ha
c om
OTM returns to the Identification tab.
a c le e
9. Enter an Address Line of 123 MAIN STREET.
@ or Guid
10. Enter a City of PHOENIX. t
ut dent
11. Enter a Province Code of AZ. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
13. Enter a Country Code of USA. h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cen
OTM displays the Roles tab. k
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
OTM displays the Role page.
u nsf
H
r h ik n-tra
17. Enter an Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 1H (already created).
t
Ka no
This activity time definition specifies a fixed stop time of 1 hour.
18. Click Save to the far right of the Activity Time Definition ID field.
Create a Destination Location

21. Click Create Another. (Shipment Management > Location Manager)
22. Enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE.
23. Enter a Corporation ID of GENERAL STORE INC (already created).
24. Enter an Address Line of 2100 WILSHIRE BLVD.
25. Enter a City of LOS ANGELES.
26. Enter a Province Code of CA.


32. Enter an Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 30M (already created).
This activity time definition specifies a fixed stop time of 30 minutes.
33. Click Save to the far right of the Activity Time Definition ID field.
s a
) ha
Verifying a Destination Location
c om
a c le e
The location for the San Diego Store has been created for you. Search for the San Diego Store
and verify the following data:
@ or Guid
Question t
ut dent
Enter Your Answers
What is the stop time for i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
SAN DIEGO STORE?
Who is the contact listed h
ik o us
for this store? r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Creating Locations
Creating a Source Location
You successfully created a location with an ID of PHOENIX DC.
Creating a Destination Location

You successfully created a location with an ID of LOS ANGELES STORE.
Verifying a Destination Location

The data for the San Diego Store is as follows:
Question Enter Your Answers
What is the stop time for 30 M (Click the + next to SHIP FROM/SHIP TO)
SAN DIEGO STORE?
s a
) ha
Who is the contact listed Miranda Michaels
om
for this store?
c
le e
a c
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Locations

Lesson 17: Creating Calendars
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 17: Creating Calendars

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars
Creating a Calendar

4. Click the ID.
6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role.
s a
7. Click v (view) next to Calendar ID.
) ha
c om
Cyclical calendars represent activities that occur in a cycle such as daily or weekly. For

a cyclical calendar, you must specify:
a c le e
or Guid
Start Date For example, if you want your weekly cycle to start on Mondays, select
@
a date that is a Monday. t
ut dent
i m
Days in Cycle Common values are 1 for a daily calendar and 7 for a weekly
th Stu
calendar. a n

h ulik e this
Annual calendars cover a period of time that does not repeat. For annual calendars,
h ik o us
you must specify that you would like this calendar to be an annual calendar with non-
r t
cyclical activities.
( k a se t
u tt cen
In the Activities section, note the Times and Activity. Since your Days in Cycle is 1, the
t h i m l e li
detail will apply to every day in your calendar. In this example, the calendar tells OTM
l i k an erab
that receiving is performed at this location between 6AM and 9PM every day.
H u nsf
Since this calendar is attached to a location, OTM determines that the location only
rt h ik n-tra
receives cargo during the time window explicitly specified here. You could add an
Ka noactivity for the remaining hours of the day telling OTM to not perform receiving but it is
not required.
Note the Override Name of CHRISTMAS. In this example, OTM prevents receiving
activities during Christmas Day regardless of what is defined in the Activities section
above.
Note the Activity Time Factor in both the Activities and Override grids. An activity time
factor is used to alter the amount of time an appointment will take to finish at a given
location. The activity time on the shipment stop is multiplied by the value you enter in
the Activity Time Factor field. The resulting value is used determine the appointment
slots used for making an appointment.
8. Close the Calendar page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars

Practice 1 - Creating Calendars
In this practice, you are going to add a calendar to your Los Angeles Store location.
Creating a Calendar

4. Click the ID.
6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role you
s a
previously created.
) ha
c om
7. Click n (new) next to Calendar ID.
a c le e
OTM displays the Calendar manager.
@ or Guid
8. Enter a Calendar ID of 6AM TO 9PM. t
ut dent
9. Enter Calendar Notes of 6AM TO 9PM 7 DAYS. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
10. Select the option button next to I would like this calendars cycle to be 7 days long.
11. Enter 1 into the days long text field. h
ik o us
r t
a se th
12. Select a morning of date of the previous Monday.
(
tt cenk
13. Click Next at the bottom of the page.
i m u li
OTM displays the Calendar detail page.
t h l e
l i k an erab
14. Enter a Day of 1.
u nsf
Since your cycle is 1, the detail will apply to every day in your calendar.
H
r h ik n-tra
15. Select a Start Time of 6AM and :00 minutes.
t
Ka no
16. Select an End Time of 9PM and :00 minutes.
17. Select an Activity of RECEIVE.
18. Mark the option button next to Perform.
19. Click Save to the right of the Activity Time Factor field.
20. Click Activity Calendar Overrides at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Activity Calendar Overrides page.
21. Enter an Override Name of CHRISTMAS.
22. Click the Calendar icon next to Start Date and select the upcoming December 25.
23. Select the Activity of RECEIVE.
24. Mark the option button next to Dont Perform.
25. Click Save to the right of the Activity Time Factor field.
OTM returns to the Role page. OTM applies your calendar to Los Angeles General Store.

s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Creating Calendars
Creating a Calendar
You successfully created a calendar with an ID of 6AM to 9PM on your LOS ANGELES STORE
location.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Calendars

Lesson 18: Creating Contacts
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 18: Creating Contacts

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts
Creating a Contact
1. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contacts.
2. Enter a Contact ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER.

OTM displays the Contacts results page.
4. Click the ID.
The Contact Manager is used to create a contact and provide specific details that
relate to the contact. Some of the information specified on the Contact Manager is
reflected on related documents such as invoices and bills.
Note the Language Spoken. OTM selects a tender notification template matching the
language you specify.
s a
) ha
Note the User ID. If you want the contact to use Message Center to review messages,
you must specify the user ID for the contact.
c om
OTM automatically populates the location field. a c le e
Note the Location. When you create a contact through a location or service provider,
@ or Guid
Note the Notification On check box. This check box must be marked to enable
notification.
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
5. Click the Notification tab.
a n

ulik e this
Note the Com Method ID. This indicates the preferred communication method for this
h
r t ik o us
contact. Options include EMAIL and MESSAGE CENTER. Depending on the
h
communication method selected, different fields may need to be populated on the
( k a se t
Contact tab. For example, if you specify a communication method ID of EMAIL, you
u tt cen
must specify an Email Address on the Contact tab.
t h i m l e li
Note the Rank of 1. This field prioritizes the communication methods you specify.
l i k an erab
H u nsf
Note the Calendar ID. If you leave the calendar undefined, OTM assumes your contact
is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
rt h ik n-tra
Note that there is a second communication method ID of MANUAL with a rank of 2.
Ka noYou can enter as many communication methods as you need.
Note: OTM selects the highest-ranked communication method supported by both the
service provider and planner at the time of notification.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts

Practice 1 - Creating Contacts
You are going to add a new contact to an existing location. Instead of creating the contact and
then assigning it to the location, you will edit the location and then create a new contact for that
location.
Creating a Contact

2. On the Location search tab, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX.
4. Click the ID.
5. Click the Communication and Remarks tab.
OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab.
s a
) ha
6. Within the Additional Contacts section, click n (new) next to Contact ID.
OTM displays the Contact Manager.
c om
a c le e
8. Enter a First Name of MARK.
@ or Guid
9. Enter a Last Name of JONES. t
ut dent
10. Select a Language Spoken of English. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
11. Click f (find) next to User ID.
OTM displays the User search page.
h
ik o us
t h
12. Enter a Domain Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, CORE102).
r
a se t
( k
tt cen
m u li
OTM displays the Users results page.
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
14. Mark the option button next to YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN.
u nsf
H
rt h ik n-tra
OTM returns to the Contact tab.
Ka no
16. Ensure that the Notification On check box is selected. It should be selected by default.
17. Click Contact Notification at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Notification tab.
18. Select a Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER.
19. Enter a Rank of 1.
20. Click Save to the right of the Calendar ID field.
21. Select a second Communication Method of MANUAL.
22. Enter a Rank of 2.
OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab and applies your contact to the
Phoenix DC.
25. Click Save to the far right of the Contact ID field.
Practice 1 - Creating Contacts

Solution Creating Contacts
Creating a Contact
You successfully created a contact with an ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER. This contact is
associated with your PHOENIX DC location.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Contacts

Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities
Commodities are used in the shipment planning process and allow you to control things like
mode compatibility, equipment compatibility (including temperature range compatibility) as well
as commodity to commodity compatibility.
Creating a Commodity
1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Commodity.

2. Click New at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Commodity manager.
3. Enter a Commodity ID of SHELL FISH.
4. Select the Temperature Control check box.
When you select this check box, OTM only selects equipment that supports the
temperature range you specify in the Temperature Control ID field.
s a
) ha
5. Enter a Temperature Control ID of REFRIGERATED.
om
You can define the minimum and maximum temperature this commodity must stay within.
6. Select a Mode Profile of AIR. c
le e
a c
to ensure your shell fish is transported via air. @ or Guid
Your commodity might require a specific transport mode to be used. For example, you want
t
ut dent
Also note the following fields:
i m
th Stu
n
Equipment Group Profile ID allows you to specify equipment groups that are
a
h ulik e this
compatible or incompatible with this commodity.

r t h ik o us
Commodity Incompatibilities allows you to specify commodities that OTM should not
( k a se t
plan with the commodity you are currently creating. For example, do not plan
tt cen
chemicals and food into one shipment.
u
t h i m l e li
It is not necessary to save the page.
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities

Practice 1 - Creating Commodities
Create two commodities: one for snack food and a second for automotive parts.
1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Commodity.

3. Enter a Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD.
5. Click Create Another. (Order Management > Material Management > Commodity)
s a
) ha
6. Enter a Commodity ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS.
c om
a c le e
7. Enter a Commodity Incompatibilities of SNACK FOOD (from previous exercise).
8. Click Save to the right of the Commodity Incompatibilities field.
@ or Guid
9. Click Finished at the top of the page. t
ut dent
OTM displays the confirmation page. i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Creating Commodities

Solution Creating Commodities
You successfully created a commodity with an ID of SNACK FOOD.
You successfully created a commodity with an ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS and indicated it is

incompatible with the SNACK FOOD commodity.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Commodities

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items
Viewing an Item
1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Item.
3. Click the Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES.

4. Note the Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD.
This is where you link your item with a commodity
5. Note the effective and expiration dates. You can prevent OTM from building shipments
containing items outside their effective time window.
6. Note the classification standards fields such as NMFC Article ID, STCC ID, and HTS ID.
You can specify different industry classifications for an item. If you cannot find the
classification system you need, you can define your own using the User Defined
Commodity ID and User Defined Commodity List ID fields. s a
Note the NMFC (National Motor Freight Classification) classification which includes ) ha
c om
class 50 to class 500 and is used for Less-than-Truckload or LTL rating. The NMFC

c le e
provides both carriers and shippers with a standard by which to begin pricing
a
or Guid
negotiations and greatly simplifies the comparative evaluation of the many thousands
@
t
ut dent
of products moving in today's marketplace. The higher the expense or the risk of
i m
hauling the commodity, the higher the class designation. Therefore, the higher the
th Stu
n
class, the higher the corresponding per hundredweight rate.
a

ulik e this
Note the STCC (Standard Transportation Commodity Code) codes which are mostly
h
r t h ik o us
used for rail are important to have for rating purposes.
a se t
Note the HTS (Harmonized Tariff System) codes which are an international commodity
( k
tt cen
classification developed under the auspices of the Customs Cooperation Council. In
u
t h m l e li
the Harmonized System, goods are classified by what they are, and not according to
i
an erab
their stage of fabrication, their use, or origin. The Harmonized System nomenclature is
l i k
logically structured by economic activity or component material.
u nsf
H
ik n-tra
Note the SITC (Standard International Trade Classification) codes which are a
rt h standard numerical code system developed by the United Nations to classify
Ka nocommodities used in international trade. OTM provides a list of SITC codes that you
can use or you can add your own.
Viewing the Auto-generated Packaged Item

By default, when you create a new item, OTM will create a new packaged item with the exact
same ID as the item. So in this example, when the item CHOCOLATE COOKIES was created, a
new packaged item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES was also created by OTM.
7. Click the Packaged Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES.
OTM displays the Packaged Item page.
8. Note the Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX.
In this example, there is a packaging unit of LARGE BOX. This is the package in which
smaller boxes are being shipped.
9. Note the Package Weight of 25 LB.
Note the Package Weight. Since there is a packaging unit specified OTM interprets the
package weight as the weight of 10 small boxes and the tare weight of the packaging unit.
10. Note the Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX.

11. Scroll down and note the Inner Pack Count of 10.
Note the Inner Pack Count. This is the number of packaged items in each packaging unit. In
this example, you are shipping 10 small boxes of the item in a large box
12. Close the Packaged Item page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 2 - Creating Items
Creating an Item
OTM displays the Header tab.

3. Enter an Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES.
4. Enter a Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD (from previous exercise).
OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES
with an identical ID.
Editing the Packaged Item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES

s a
) ha
Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information.
6. Click Order Management > Material Management > Packaged Item.
7. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CHOC. c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
9. Click the CHOCOLATE COOKIES link. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Packaged Item page. i m
th Stu
10. Select a Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX.
a n
11. Enter a Package Weight of 25 LB.
h ulik e this
h ik o us
12. Select an Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX.
r t
k a se t
13. Scroll down and enter an Inner Pack Count of 10.
(
u tt cen
t h i m l
OTM displays the confirmation page.e li
l i k an erab
Creating u an Item sf
i H
kClick Order r n
aManagement
t h
15.
n - t > Material Management > Item.
Kar16. Click o
n New at the bottom of the page.
17. Enter an Item ID of CRACKERS.
18. Enter a Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD (from previous exercise).
OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of CRACKERS with an
identical ID.
Editing the Packaged Item CRACKERS

Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information.
20. Click Order Management > Material Management > Packaged Item.
21. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CRACKER.
23. Click the CRACKERS link.
OTM displays the Packaged Item page.
24. Select a Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX.

25. Enter a Package Weight of 20 LB.
26. Select an Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX.
27. Scroll down and enter an Inner Pack Count of 10.
Creating an Item
31. Enter an Item ID of MOTOR OIL.
32. Enter a Commodity ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS (from previous exercise).
33. Enter a NMFC Class ID of 60.0 (already created).
s a
) ha
OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of MOTOR OIL with an
c om
identical ID.
a c le e
Editing the Packaged Item MOTOR OIL
@ or Guid
Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information. t
ut dent
35. Click Order Management > Material Management t>hPackaged i m tuItem.
a n S
36. Enter a Packaged Item ID of MOTOR.
h u lik this
i k u s e
38. Click the MOTOR OIL link. h
art se to
OTM displays the Packaged ( k
tt Itemcepage.
n
i m u l i
39. Select a Packaging
t h Unit of
l eLARGE BOX.
k an Pack
40. Select an Inner
l i e r b
aPackaging Unit of CAN.
Hudownraand
41. Scroll
n f
senter an Inner Pack Count of 6.
i k -t at the top of the page.
th ClickoFinished
a r42. n
n displays the confirmation page.
K OTM

Solution Creating Items
Creating an Item
You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of CHOCOLATE COOKIES.
You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of CRACKERS.
You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of MOTOR OIL.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Items

Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group
Profiles
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups
Creating an Equipment Group
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group.
2. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER.

OTM displays the Equipment Groups results page.
4. Click the ID.
5. In the top part of the page, note the following
Note the Effective Volume, Effective Weight, Length, Width, and Height fields. OTM
plans shipments using only equipment that can handle the volume, weight, and
dimensions of your goods. These dimensions are used in planning and optimization
calculations.
s a
) ha
6. Scroll down until you see the Capacity in Reference Units section.

c om
You can specify Equipment Reference Units (ERUs) to define specific capacity limits.
You can define an equipment reference unit for transport handling units so regardless
a c le e
of how OTM optimizes, whether for weight, volume, or both, the equipment reference
or Guid
unit serves as a constraint to avoid overloading the equipment.
@
t
ut dent
You can select multiple ERUs. Since you can have multiple ship units on an order, you
can have multiple ERUs. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
7. Scroll back up to the top of the page:
h
Note the Temperature Control ID. OTM matches the temperature constraints on your
ik o us
r t h
commodities with the temperature range supported by the equipment group. OTM
a se t
( k
combines commodities with equipment within the same temperature range.
tt cen
u li
The Door Height and Curve ID fields are only considered when using the load
i m
t h l e
configuration functionality.
l i k an erab
8. In the bottom half of the page, note Equipment Types section:
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Equipment Types are used to define the characteristics of an equipment group. Using
Intermodal Trailers as an example of an equipment group profile, the group in that
Ka noprofile could be 45' or 48' trailers. The equipment type against that group would be
either a rollup or swing door trailer.
Equipment types are used to determine capacity information for a service provider.
Capacity information can be critical in the shipment planning process.
An equipment type is not required.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups

Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group.
OTM displays the Equipment Group page.

3. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER.
4. Enter an Effective Volume of 3576 CU FT.
5. Enter an Effective Weight of 48000 LB.
6. Enter a Length of 47.5 FT.
7. Enter a Width of 8.25 FT.
8. Enter a Height of 9.25 FT.
s a
) ha
c om
Verifying Equipment Group
a c le e
10. Click Modify Another.
@ or Guid
11. Search for an Equipment Group ID of 53FT TRAILER. t
ut dent
Question i m
th Stu
Enter Your Answers
a n
What is the effective
weight of the Equipment h ulik e this
Group 53FT TRAILER?
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
(Hint: Go to Shipment
Management
t h i m
>
l e li
l i k an eGroup.)
Equipment
r ab
Management
Hu rans
> Equipmentf
i k t
Karth non-
Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups

Solution Creating Equipment Groups
You successfully created an equipment group with an ID of 48FT TRAILER.
Verifying Equipment Group

You successfully verified the following equipment:

What is the effective weight 49000.00 LB
of the Equipment Group
53FT TRAILER?
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Equipment Groups

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles
Creating an Equipment Group Profile
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group Profile.
2. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT.

OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile results page.
4. Click the ID.
Note the Compatible check box. This is used to include or exclude equipment groups in
the profile when computing results.
If you mark the Compatible check box, OTM must use one of the equipment groups
listed in the equipment group profile.
If you leave the Compatible check box cleared, OTM cannot use any of the a
s
) ha
equipment groups listed in the equipment group profile.
c om
When you assign the equipment group profile to other objects in OTM such as
a c le e
commodity, rates, itinerary, location, or order, OTM determines if it is compatible or
incompatible with the object to which it is assigned using the Compatible check box.
@ or Guid
Note the Equipment Group ID. You can enter as many equipment groups as you need.
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles

Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles
1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group Profile.
OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile page.

4. Mark the Compatible check box.
5. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER (from previous exercise).
6. Click Save to the right of the Equipment Group ID field.
s a
) ha
8. Click Create Another. (Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment
Group Profile) c om
a c le e
OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile page.
@ or Guid
9. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 53FT TRAILERS INCOMPAT.t
ut dent
10. Ensure the Compatible check box is not marked. i m
th Stu
a n
11. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 53FT TRAILER (from previous exercise).
h ulik e this
h ik o us
13. Enter a second Equipment Group ID of 53FT DOMESTIC CONTAINER (already exists).
r t
k a se t
(
u tt cen
15. Enter a third Equipment Group ID of 53FT DRY VAN (already exists).
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles

Solution Creating Equipment Group Profiles
You successfully created an equipment group profile with an ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT.
You successfully created an equipment group profile with an ID of 53FT TRAILERS
INCOMPAT.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Equipment Group Profiles

Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles
Assigning an Equipment Group Profile to a Location

4. Click the ID.
5. Click the Routing tab.
OTM displays the Routing tab.
6. Enter an Equipment Group Profile of 53FT TRAILERS INCOMPAT (from previous
exercise).
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles

Solution Assigning Equipment Group Profiles
Assigning an Equipment Group Profile to a Location
You successfully assigned the equipment group profile of 53FT INCOMPAT to your LOS
ANGELES STORE location.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Assigning Equipment Group Profiles

Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers
Creating a Service Provider
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Service Provider Manager.
OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab.

3. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of DEMOSP.
Note the service provider information looks similar to locations.
4. Enter a Corporation ID of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING (from previous exercise).
Note the SCAC field. You can specify the SCAC assigned to a service provider. A
Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC) identifies transportation companies.
Note the Mode Profile. The mode profile is a grouping of transport modes. Each
service provider can be associated to one mode profile containing one to many
s a
) ha
transport modes.

service providers. c om
Note the Service Provider Alias section. This provides an alternate way of identifying
a c le e
or Guid
t @
You can specify location specific information such as address, city, state/province, and
country. ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
OTM automatically creates a:
h ulik e this
Corresponding location
r t h ik o us

k a se t
User ID in the SERVPROV domain
(
u t
tContact e n
m l i c
thi and
Adding a Service Provider
When you click a n
Finished
a b le creates a user ID for this service provider, you can then
OTM
ulikinformation
enter contact
s f erfor the service provider.
7. ik H anthe confirmation page.
Click Edit ron
t h - t
n Communication and Remarks tab.
Kar8. Click
nothe
9. Select a Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER.
10. Click f (find) next to User ID.
OTM displays the User search tab.
11. Enter a User Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, COREDEMO).
13. Mark the option button next to SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-DEMOSP.
This is the default naming convention OTM uses to create a user ID for service providers.
OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab.
OTM automatically creates a primary contact for your service provider.
Adding Service Provider Contact Details

When you click Finished and OTM creates a primary contact for you service provider, you can
then enter detailed information for the contact associated with the service provider.

16. Click Edit on the confirmation page.
OTM only displays the details button after it has created a primary contact for you.
18. Click Details on the right side of the page near the top.
OTM displays the Contact manager page in view mode.
19. Click Edit at the top of the page.

OTM displays the Contact tab.
21. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER.
22. Ensure the Rank of 1 is entered.
23. Enter a Response Time of 2 H (hours).
The response time indicates the time period in which you expect the service provider to
respond to a tender.
s a
24. Enter a Calendar ID of 4AM TO 11PM.
) ha
25. Click v (view) next to Calendar ID.
c om
OTM displays the Calendar view page.
a c le e
or Guid
OTM uses primary contacts for tendering. During tendering, OTM looks for the
@
calendar activity of OFFICEHOURS. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Note the Days in Cycle of 7. This indicates this is a weekly calendar.
a n
ulik e this
Days 1 through 5 specify that an activity of OFFICEHOURS is performed from 4:00AM
to 11:00PM.
h
ik o us

r t h
Days 6 and 7 specify that an activity of OFFICEHOURS is not available (i.e. Dont
a se t
( k
Perform). OTM would have implicitly interpreted the calendar this way without
tt cen
i m u
indicating this detail for days 6 and 7.
li
t h l e
26. Close the Calendar view page.
l i k an erab
OTM returns to the Notification tab.
H u nsf
rt ik n-tra
h
Ka no
30. Click Finished at the top of the Service Provider ID page.

Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers
To create a service provider, you first need to enter the basic data for the service provider.
Creating a Truckload Service Provider


3. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of BTT9.
4. Enter a Service Provider/Location Name of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING.
6. Enter a Corporation ID of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING.
OTM returns to the Service Provider ID tab.
s a
8. Select a Mode Profile of TL.
) ha
c om
10. Select a Time Zone of America/Phoenix.
a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM displays the confirmation page. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers

Solution Creating Service Providers
You successfully created a service provider with an ID of BTT9.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Service Providers

Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts
When you click Finished and OTM creates a User ID for this service provider, you can then
enter contact information for the service provider.
Adding a Service Provider Contact


3. Select the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER.
4. Click on f (find) next to User ID.
OTM displays the Users Finder page.
5. Enter a User Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, CORE101).
s a
) ha
7. Mark the option button next to SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-BTT9.
c om
a c le e
OTM creates a user account in the SERVPROV domain for you every time you create a
service provider in any domain.
@ or Guid
8. Click Finish at the top of the page. t
ut dent
OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
9. Click Finished at the top of the Service Provider ID page.
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts

Solution Adding Service Provider Contacts
You successfully added a service provider contact to your BTT9 service provider.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Adding Service Provider Contacts

Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details
When you clicked Finished and OTM created a primary contact for your service provider, you
can then enter detailed information for this contact associated with the service provider.
You are also going to add a second service provider, including contact details, for ANTELOPE
LINE.
Adding the Service Provider Contact Details

OTM displays the Contact Manager page in view mode.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
6. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the right of the Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER.
7. Enter a Response Time of 2 H (hours). i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
9. Click Save next to the Calendar ID field.
h
ik o us
10. Select a Com Method ID of MANUAL.
r t
a se th
11. Enter a Rank of 2. (
tt cenk
m u li
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
u nsf
H
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
17. Click Finished.
Note: You may see an error message about saving or canceling you changes since
changes have been made while you were editing your contact. This is normal.
18. Click the plus sign next to Show Changes.
19. Click Save Your Changes at the bottom of the message.
Creating a Service Provider

You will add a second service provider, including contact details, for ANTELOPE LINE.
22. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of ATL9.
23. Enter a Service Provider/Location Name of ANTELOPE LINE.

OTM displays the Corporation manager.
25. Enter a Corporation ID of ANTELOPE LINE INC.
OTM returns to the Service Provider ID tab.
27. Select a Mode Profile of TL.

29. Select a Time Zone of America/Phoenix.

s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
34. Click on f (find) next to User ID. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Users search page. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
35. Enter a User Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, CORE101).
h
ik o us
r t h
37. Mark the option button next to SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-ATL9.
a se t
( k
tt cen
m u li
OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab.
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
u nsf
H
rt h
Adding tra Provider Contact Details
ik then-Service
Ka no
OTM displays the Contact manager page in view mode.
45. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the right of the Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER.

51. Click Finished.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Adding Service Provider Contact Details
Adding the Service Provider Contact Details
You successfully added details to your service provider contact for the BTT9 service provider.

You successfully created a service provider with an ID of ATL9. You also created a service
provider contact and added details for the contact.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Adding Service Provider Contact Details

Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification
Configuring Contact Notification
1. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contact
Notification.
2. Enter a Contact Notification ID of SHIPMENT TENDER DECLINED.

OTM ships with certain notify subject records.
4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Contact Notification manager.
You can enable contact notification by contact, contact group (if your contact is defined
as a contact group), or involved party.
Note the Contact ID. One to many contacts can subscribe to this event. a
s
Note the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER. You can specify a
) ha
communication method or choose BY CONTACT which enables OTM to use the
ranked list of communication methods in each contact. c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
Within the Communication Methods section, you can see the stylesheets used by each
communication method. If you have a stylesheet which is customized for your
company, you can specify it here. t
ut dent
5. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of DEMO. i m
th Stu
a n
6. Click v (view) next to Contact ID.
h ulik e this
OTM displays the Contact page.
r t h ik o us
a se t
Within the Contacts section, note the Group Contact ID. Multiple contacts belong to a
( k
tt cen
contact group. OTM can send a notification as a broadcast to more than one contact
u
t h m l e li
using a contact group. In this example, there are two contacts associated with this
i
an erab
contact group.
l i
u nsfk
Within the Contact Notifications section, note the Subject. This is the event to which
H
ik n-tra
this contact group subscribes. Multiple events can be listed.
rt h
7. Close the Contact manager page.
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification

Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification
Set up OTM so the planner receives a message when a tender is declined.
Notification.
2. Enter a Contact Notification ID of SHIPMENT TENDER DECLINED.

4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Contact Notification manager.
7. Click Save to the far right of the Contact ID field.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification

Solution Configuring Contact Notification
You successfully set up contact notification for your PHOENIX DC PLANNER contact. When a
shipment tender is declined, OTM will notify the planner through message center.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Configuring Contact Notification

Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Automation Agents
Creating an Automation Agent
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Automation Agent.
2. Enter an Agent ID of TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR.

4. Click the ID.
Note the tabs in the Agent Manager.
On the Agent Header tab, you define when the automation agent should run.
On the Actions tab, you define what the automation agent does when it runs.
On the Error Handler tab, you define actions to run if the first set of actions on the
Actions tab fails.
Note the Active check box. OTM only runs automation agents when this check box is
s a
marked.
) ha
om
Note the Event. The automation agent runs when this event occurs. You can enter
c
more than one event.
a c le e
5. Click the Actions tab.
@ or Guid
Note the icons. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Pencil Displays the details of the automation agent action for editing its parameters.
a n
ulik e this
Trash can Deletes an automation agent action.
h
Green plus sign (+) Inserts a new automation agent action on the row below.
ik o us
r t
a se th
6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the SET INDICTATOR: G action.
(
tt cenk
Note the Indicator Value. Depending on the automation agent action selected, different
m u
parameters are available.
i li
t h l e
l i k an erab
7. Close the Agent Action Parameters page.
u nsf
OTM returns to the Actions tab.
H
rt h ik n-tra
8. Click the Error Handler tab.
Ka no
You can add additional actions to run if the first set of actions on the Actions tab fails.
Typically, these would notify a contact that an error has occurred.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Automation Agents

Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Automation Agent.
OTM displays the Agent Header tab.

3. Enter an Agent ID of TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR.
4. Select an Agent Type of SHIPMENT.
5. Mark the Active check box.
6. Enter an Event of SHIPMENT TENDER ACCEPTED.
7. Click Save to the right of the Restrictions field.
8. Click View / Enter Actions at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Actions tab.
s a
9. Click Add Action.
) ha
c
OTM displays the Agent Action Selection For: TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR page.
om
10. Select the Action of SET INDICATOR.
a c le e
11. Select the Indicator Value of G (green).
@ or Guid
12. Click Save at the bottom of the page. t
ut dent
OTM returns to the Actions tab. i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents

Solution Creating an Automation Agent
You successfully created an automation agent with the ID of TENDER ACCEPTED
INDICATOR.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating an Automation Agent

Lesson 24: Contract Management
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 24: Contract Management

Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Rate Distances
Configuring a Rate Distance
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Contracts > Rate Distance.
OTM ships with certain rate distance records.

3. Click New at the top of the page.
OTM uses the information on the rate distance to determine how to calculate the
distance from one location to another location.
OTM uses the distance type and takes into account the distance cutoffs for estimating
purposes.
Rate distance is used to either estimate or lookup distance when calculating a rate or
simulating service time.
s a
) ha
4. Select a Distance Type of ESTIMATE.
locations. c om
When selected, OTM estimates the distance based on the latitude/longitude values on the
a c le e
or Guid
5. Select a Distance Type of LOOKUP.
t @
When selected, OTM uses pre-defined distance values to determine the distance. These
ut dent
values can be entered into OTM through the Shipment Management > Power Data >
i m
th Stu
Geography > Distance menu option. Or, OTM can communicate with third party software to
a n
ulik e this
lookup distances.
6. Mark the Estimate Allowed check box. h
ik o us
r t
a se th
When this check box is marked, OTM will use the pre-defined distance value if one exists or
( k
estimate the distance using the latitude/longitude values on the locations. The distance type
tt cen
i m u
should be set to LOOKUP if you selected the Estimate Allowed check box.
li
t h l e
7. Enter a Short Distance Cutoff of 10 MI.
l i k an erab
8. Enter a Short Distance Factor of 1.6
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
To better estimate the distance, OTM multiples the estimated distances which are
shorter than the short distance cutoff with the short distance factor and uses the
Ka no resulting value as the distance.
In this example, for distances less than 10 miles, OTM multiples the calculated
distance by a factor of 1.6.
9. Enter a Long Distance Cutoff of 110 MI.
10. Enter a Long Distance Factor of 1.1
To better estimate the distance, OTM multiples the estimated distances which are
longer than the long distance cutoff with the long distance factor and uses the resulting
value as the distance.
In this example, for distances greater than 110 miles, OTM multiples the calculated
distance by a factor of 1.1.
If the estimated distance value falls between the short distance cutoff and long
distance cutoff values, OTM prorates the distance factor between the defined factors.
11. Note the External Distance Engine ID.
Instead of entering specific distances into OTM, OTM can communicate with third party
software to lookup distances. Please refer to the latest documentation for a current list of
supported software.

Configuring Distance in OTM
If you select a Distance Type of LOOKUP, OTM uses pre-defined distance values to determine
the distance. These values can be entered directly into OTM or OTM can communicate with
third party software to lookup distances. Lets look at where you can set up these pre-defined
distance values within OTM.
12. Click Shipment Management > Power Data > Geography > Distance.
13. Enter a Lane ID of AZ-SD.

OTM displays the Distance results page.
15. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Distance Lookup view page.
Each distance in OTM must specify a lane ID, a rate distance ID, and a value.
16. Click the Lane ID of AZ-SD.
s a
) ha
OTM displays the Lane Definitions view page in a new window.

as a street address, or more general, such as a state or region. c om
The lane connects two geographic points. The geographic points can be specific, such
a c le e
@ or Guid
For distances, lanes define the start and end point to which the distance value applies.
In this example, the lane is general from Arizona to San Diego, California.

t
ut dent
i m
If you are using distance values to calculate rates, you are going to want your
th Stu
distances to be very specific.
a n
17. Close the Lane Definitions view page.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
OTM returns to the Distance Lookup page.
a se t
Note the Rate Distance ID. This tells OTM how to calculate the distance. OTM ships
( k
tt cen
with three options:
u
t h i m l e li
ESTIMATE OTM estimates the rate distance based on the latitude and longitude
l i k an erab
on the locations.
H u nsf
LOOKUP ONLY OTM uses the distance tables or a third-party software package
rt h ik n-tra to calculate distance.
Ka no LOOKUP ELSE ESTIMATE OTM first tries use the distance tables or a third-party
software packaged to calculate distances. If a result is not returned, then OTM
estimates the distance based on the latitude and longitude on the locations.
Note the Value. This is the distance value which applies to the lane specified in the
Lane ID field.
In this example, the distance from Arizona to San Diego, California is 355 miles.

Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services
Creating a Rate Service
In this guided demonstration, the focus is on rate services that relate to truckload. Rate services
associated with other modes are covered in later lessons.
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Service.
2. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL.

4. Click the ID.
Note the Rate Service Type. There are a number of rate service types available which
calculate transit time based on different factors. Depending on the rate service type
selected, the fields on the Rate Service Details tab are different.
In this example, the rate service type of SIMULATION calculates transit time based on
s a
) ha
the distance and speed you define on the Rate Service Details tab as well as any time
windows you have defined on other OTM objects such as locations.

c om
Note the Time Window Tolerance: Enter a numeric value for the number of hours you
c le e
want to add to the pickup and delivery times for shipments. The value you enter adds
a
or Guid
to the allowable late times established for pickup and delivery at shipment locations.
@
t
ut dent
Note the When the Ignore Delivery Location Calendar check box: When this check box
i m
th Stu
is selected, the drive routing ignores the delivery location calendar. This only applies to
Day Duration and Distance Duration. a n

h ulik e this
Note the Max Weight Time per Stop: This is the maximum time allowed to wait to

pickup or drop off goods.
r t h ik o us
k a se t
Note the Max Long Haul Wait Time: This is used to configure a wait time associated
(
u tt cen
with the first delivery stop after a long haul. There can be a large amount of time
t h i m l e li
between the last pickup and the first delivery stop so use this field to accommodate a
l i k an erab
wait time for the long haul move.
u nsf
5. Click the Rate Service Details tab.
H
rt h ik n-tra
Note the HOS Rule Set ID: Indicates which hours of service rules to honor for this rate
Ka no service. When a shipment is created using this rate service type, the HOS rules
associated with it are considered "fresh" at the start of the shipment, and rest time will
be inserted into the shipment as required by the rules. An HOS rule set contains a set
of HOS rules that when honored, verifies a driver is complying with department of
transportation requirements. HOS rule sets are used in external drive and simulation
types of rate services.
Note the Initial Rest Time. If a driver is not fully rested, OTM can take into account an
initial rest time and factor this into the transit time.
Note the Distance, Speed, and Min Transit Time fields.
OTM uses distance and speed values to calculate the rate service speed (or how
long the trip takes).
The min transit time is the absolute minimum time it takes to move from one location
to another. OTM uses this time if the calculated transit time is less than the
minimum transit time.
For example, a truck is traveling a distance of 90 miles. OTM calculates the transit
time as 90MI / 45MPH = 2H (hours) and then adds any time windows required. If

you have set a min transit time of 3 hours, OTM will use that value if the calculated
time is less than the min transit time.
Creating a Rate Service with Different Rate Service Types

The Rate Service Details tab looks different depending on the rate service type selected. Well
look at a couple examples.
6. Click the Rate Service Header tab.

7. Select a Rate Service Type of LOOKUP.
In this example, you define the transit time for each lane. A lane connects two geographical
points and can be specific (i.e. a street address) or general (i.e. city, province, country, or
region). For example, the transit time between US zip code 19406 and the location Los
Angeles General Store is three days, 18 hours, and 30 minutes.
s a
) ha
10. Select a Rate Service Type of GROUNDSERVICE.
c om
a c le e
In this example, you are using a repetition schedule to determine the frequency and
or Guid
location routing for a shipment. These are typically created for repetitive rail and truck
@
routes.
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
13. Select a Rate Service Type of EXTERNALDRIVE.
a n
h ulik e this

h ik o us
Note the HOS Rule Set ID. See the explanation under the rate service type of
r t
simulation.
( k a se t
u tt cen
Note the External Service Engine ID. You can refer to a third party software package
h i m li
which communicates with OTM and provides transit time information. Refer to the
t l e
l i k an erab
latest documentation for a current list of supported third party software.
u nsf
H
r h ik n-tra
16. Select a Rate Service Type of DISTANCEDURATION.
t
Ka no
17. Click l (list) next to Calendar.
18. Select any calendar.
OTM requires a calendar when the rate service type is DISTANCEDURATION to account
for holidays and weekends.
OTM returns to the Rate Service Header tab.
In this case, you define the transit time in number of days within a distance radius. You can
define your distance in mileage bands and, for each band, specify the transit time.
22. Select a Rate Service Type of DAYDURATION.
This rate service type also requires a calendar.
This rate service type is similar to DISTANCEDURATION, but you define the transit time
per lane instead of per mileage bands. You specify the lane and the corresponding service

days. You can also set this up by rate zone. This rate service type may be used for LTL,
parcel, or rail rates.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Service.
OTM displays the Rate Service Header tab.

3. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL.
4. Select the Rate Service Type of SIMULATION.
5. Click Details at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Rate Service Details tab.
6. Enter a Distance of 10 MI.
7. Enter a Speed of 20 MPH.
8. Click Save to the right of the Min Transit Time field.
s a
) ha
10. Enter a Speed of 45 MPH.
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
13. Enter a Speed of 55 MPH. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload

Solution Creating Rate Services for Truckload
You successfully created a rate service with an ID of SIMULATION TL.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Rate Services for Truckload

Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings
Creating a Rate Offering
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering.
2. Enter an Offering ID of BTT9 TL.

4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Rate Header tab.
5. Click the Offering Type drop-down list to see the valid offering types.
The Offering Type field determines the attributes OTM displays on the Attributes tab.
OTM ships with a list of offering types. Refer to the online help for an explanation of
these pre-defined rate offering types.
You can also define your own offering types. s a

6. Note the following fields: ) ha
c om
Note the Service Provider ID. In most cases, a contract, or rate offering, always has a
a c le e
service provider defined. One exception is for LTL rates where you have a published
or Guid
rate which all LTL service providers can use. Service providers usually provide
@
discounts off of the published rate. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Note the Rate Service ID. Every rate offering must have a rate service specified for
a n
ulik e this
OTM to calculate transit time.

h
Note the Transport Mode. Define the transport mode for which this rate offering is valid.
ik o us
t h
OTM ships with a list of transport modes.
r
a se t
( k
Note the Perspective. Define whether this rate offering is valid for buy shipments, sell
tt cen
i m u
shipments, or both.
li
t h l e
Note the Version. Specify the effective and expiration dates for which this rate offering
l i k an erab
is valid.
H u nsf
Note the Exchange Rate ID. You can define an exchange rate to be used with this rate
rt h ik n-tra
offering. This exchange rate is used by OTM when calculating cost.
Ka no Note the Active check box. Mark this check box to indicate a rate offering is active and
can be used during planning.
Note the Sourcing Template and Sourcing Rate options. These options only pertain
when you are using Oracle Transportation Sourcing to source your rates.
Note the many fields for minimum and maximum values related to dimensions and
distance. A rate offering will only be used if the shipment being planned honors these
constraints.
7. Click the Attributes tab.
OTM displays the Attributes tab.
Note the Stops Included in Rate of 2. This indicates the number of free stops included
in the rate before stop-off charges apply. Shipments must have a minimum of two
stops: a pickup stop and a delivery stop.
Note the Total All Stops of 4. This indicates the total number of pickup stops and
delivery stops this rate offering supports. In this case, the rate offering supports the 2
stops included in the rate plus 2 additional stops. If this field is not populated, OTM
assumes that an unlimited number of stops are supported by this rate offering.

Note the Pickup Stops of 1.
Note the Delivery Stops of 3.
The sum of your Pickup Stops field and Delivery Stops field must equal the Total All
Stops field. You can also leave these fields blank to allow any combination of pickup
and delivery stops.

Note the Low Stop of 1 and High Stop of 1.

This indicates the first stop in addition to the stops included in rate.
In this example, if a shipment is built with one additional stop above the stops
included in the rate, OTM charges 105.00 USD more.
Note the Low Stop of 2 and High Stop of 2.
This indicates the second stop in addition to the stops included in rate.
In this example, if a shipment is built with two additional stops above the stops
included in the rate, OTM charges 105.00 USD for the first stop and 130.00 USD for
s a
) ha
the second stop.

equal the Total All Stops field. In this example, you have: c om
Note: The sum of your highest High Stop field and Stops Included in Rate field should
a c le e
Stops Included in Rate of 2 PLUS
@ or Guid
High Stop of 2 EQUALS t
ut dent
Total All Stops of 4 i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
Note the Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP ONLY. For this rate offering, OTM uses this
rate distance to calculate the distance between the locations. For certain offering types,
h
ik o us
a rate distance is not required.
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
Note the fields related to circuity which are the Circuity Allows Percentage, Circuity
Distance Cost, Maximum Circuity Penalty, and Maximum Circuity Distance fields. You
i m u li
can use these fields to determine the cost for out of route miles. So if your rate covers
t h l e
l i k an erab
two stops which you expect to be about 100 miles, you can allow for a small out of
H u nsf
route distance of an additional 10% or 10 more miles, and then charge for anything
rt h ik n-tra over that percentage. For example, there were originally two stops (A and B) which
covered 100 miles, but a stop C was added which caused the shipment to go out of
Ka no route and brought the total miles to 120. You could charge an additional out of route or
circuity cost for the extra 10 miles.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload
Creating a Rate Offering for Truckload

3. Enter an Offering ID of BTT9 TL.
4. Select an Offering Type of TL.
5. Enter a Service Provider ID of BTT9 (from previous exercise).
6. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL (from previous exercise).
7. Select a Transport Mode of TL.
8. Select a Perspective of Buy.
9. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018 (already created).
s a
10. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page.
) ha
c om
11. Enter a Stops Included in Rate of 2.
a c le e
12. Enter a Total All Stops of 4.
@ or Guid
13. Enter Pickup Stops of 1. t
ut dent
14. Enter Delivery Stops of 3. i m
th Stu
a n
15. Enter a Low Stop of 1.
h ulik e this
16. Enter a High Stop of 1.
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
17. Enter a Per Stop Charge of 105.00 USD.
tt cen
18. Click Save to the right of the Per Stop Charge field.
u
t h i m
l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
23. Enter a Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP ONLY.

25. Click Create Another. (Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate
Offering)
26. Enter an Offering ID of ATL9 TL.
27. Select an Offering Type of TL.
28. Enter a Service Provider ID of ATL9 (from previous exercise).
29. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL (from previous exercise).
30. Select a Transport Mode of TL.

34. Enter a Stops Included In Rate of 2.
35. Enter a Total All Stops of 3.
36. Enter Pickup Stops of 1.
37. Enter Delivery Stops of 2.

42. Enter a Rate Distance of LOOKUP ONLY.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload
You successfully created a rate offering with an ID of BTT9 TL.
You successfully created a rate offering with an ID of ATL9 TL.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload

Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records
Creating a Rate Record for Truckload
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record.
OTM displays the Rate Offering search tab. Whenever you create a new rate record, you
must associate it with a rate offering.
4. Enter a Rate Record ID of BTT9 AZ-CA.
6. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Lane Info tab.
There are options that can be specified on both the rate offering and rate record. As a
s a
) ha
general principle, OTM uses the value in the more specific object if it is specified in
om
both places. The rate record is more specific than the rate offering.
c
For example, the stop-off charges that were discussed in the rate offering lesson
le e
a c
or Guid
can also be specified on the rate record. If stop-off charges are specified in both
places, the data on the rate record is used.

t @
ut dent
Note the Rate Offering ID. Every rate record must be associated with a rate offering.
i m
th Stu
You can have multiple rate records associated with one rate offering.
a n
7. Click the Source Geo Hierarchy drop-down list.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
The geo hierarchy drop-down list defines the general start and end points for the rate
( k a se t
record. Regions can also be used to define this information.

tt cen
You can select the appropriate geo hierarchy for the rate you are defining. In this
u
t h m l e li
example, the source geo hierarchy is STATE/PROVINCE.
i
l i k an erab
8. Click the Destination Geo Hierarchy drop-down list.

H u nsf
Note the destination geo hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. You can combine different
rt h ik n-tra
geo hierarchies. For example, from location to country.
Ka
no The source geo hierarchy and destination geo hierarchy determine the fields that
appear on the Attributes tab.
Note the Source Geography Province Code of AZ. OTM can only use this rate record if
the potential shipment departs from Arizona. Since we specified STATE/PROVINCE as
our source geo hierarchy on the Lane Info tab, the source geography is province code.
Note the Destination Geography Province Code of CA. OTM can only use this rate
record if the potential shipment arrives in California.
This is also where you set up rate record specific stop-off information. If you enter stop-
off information here, it overrides stop-off information defined on the rate offering.
10. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the Rate Costs tab.
Note the Multi-Costs Rule drop-down list. You can define many costs on this page. The
multi-cost rule determines how OTM should combine these costs into one total cost.
Add OTM adds all valid costs listed on the Rate Costs tab and determines a final
total for the shipment.

Minimum OTM calculates the lowest valid cost and uses that for the shipment.
Maximum OTM calculates the highest valid cost and uses that for the shipment.
Note this rate record contains one rate cost. If this rate record is used for a buy
shipment, a rate cost of 600.00 USD per shipment is applied.
11. Click Add A Cost at the bottom of the page.
The Rates page contains the following sections:

Conditions define when OTM should apply a rate cost. Up to 4 conditional rules can
exist for each rate cost. If you have multiple conditional rules, you can specify how they
relate to each other:
AND All the rules must be satisfied for this rate cost to be applied.
OR One of the rules must be satisfied for this rate cost to be applied.
SELECTED OTM finds valid matches for your first conditional rule and then only
passes those matches onto the next conditional rule.
s a
) ha
Charge defines what costs OTM should apply when shipments meet the criteria
specified in the Conditions section.
There are 4 Cost Types to choose from: c om
a c le e
or Guid
Charge You can enter an Amount, a Basis, and the Unit. There are many basis
@
t
options available such as per shipment, per weight, per distance, etc. You can
ut dent
i m
limit the basis options OTM displays in the list by marking only certain basis
th Stu
options as enabled or select the basis options you want to display per rate
a n
ulik e this
offering type.
h
Discount You can enter an Apply Discount Of percentage which applies a
ik o us
r t h
discount to the current running total of shipment costs.
a se t
( k
External You can enter an External Rating Engine ID if the rate is determined
tt cen
u li
by an external rating engine.
i m
t h l e
Profile You can set up unit breaks such as weight or volume breaks.
l i k an erab
H u nsf
You can also specify a Minimum Charge or a Maximum Charge. If you define many
rt h ik n-tracosts, you can define certain rate costs as the minimum or maximum. Depending on
the setting of the Multi-Costs Rule drop-down list, OTM selects the appropriate rate
Ka no cost.
Options define the type of rate you entered in the Charge section. You must indicate if
the cost is normal, minimum, maximum, or weighted. You can also add addition rate
information such as rounding details.
Miscellaneous defines tariff information about the schedule of prices that a service
provider publishes for the movement of freight.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload
3. Enter a Rate Offering ID of BTT9 TL (previously created).
OTM displays the Rate Offering results page.
5. Ensure the option button next to BTT9 TL is marked.
s a
) ha
8. Select the Source Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
c om
9. Select the Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Attributes tab. t
ut dent
11. Enter the Source Geography Province Code of AZ. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
12. Enter the Destination Geography Province Code of CA.

13. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page.h
ik o us
r t
a se t
OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. h
(
tt cenk
i m u
OTM displays the Rates page. li
t h l e
l i k an erab
15. Ensure a Cost Type of Charge is selected.
u nsf
16. Enter an Amount of 600.00 USD.
H
r h ik n-tra
17. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment.
t
Ka no
OTM returns to the Rate Costs tab.
Creating Rate Record for Truckload

22. Enter a Rate Offering ID of ATL9 TL.
24. Ensure the option button next to ATL9 TL is marked.

26. Enter a Rate Record ID of ATL9 850-CA.
27. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of USZIP3.
28. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
30. Enter a Source Geography Postal Code of 850.

31. Enter a Destination Geography Province Code of CA.
OTM displays the Rates page.
34. Ensure a Cost Type of Charge is selected.
s a
36. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment. ) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Creating Rate Records for Truckload
You successfully created a rate record with an ID of BTT9 AZ-CA.
You successfully created a rate record with an ID of ATL9 850-CA.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Rate Records for Truckload

Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences
Creating a Rate Preference
Rate preference enables you to configure preferred rates for a lane or rate zone. When OTM
plans shipments, it will use one of the rates on this preferred list.
Note: The transport mode is important for rate preference since OTM also considers all
applicable rates for transport modes with no rate preference defined.

1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Preference.
2. Enter a Rate Preference ID of AZ CA TL.
OTM displays the Rate Preference results page.
4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Rate Preference manager.
s a
) ha
Note the Lane ID and Rate Zone Profile ID fields. OTM only uses this rate preference
om
for shipments in the geographic area defined by the lane and/or rate zone profile. A
rate zone profile can contain multiple lanes.
le ec
a c
or Guid
Note the Effective Date and Expiration Date fields. You can define when your rate
preference is valid.

t @
ut dent
Note the Rate Offering ID. List the preferred rate offerings which OTM should consider
in the specified geographic area. i m
th Stu
a n
Enabling a Rate Preference
h ulik e this
Once you create a rate preference, you
r t h ik to ospecify
need us it in a parameter set. Defining
parameters in a parameter set enables
(ka OTM t
eto build shipments based on your business
process. t t
u li>cPowere n s
5. Click Shipment h
t i m
Management
l e Data > General > Parameter Sets.
n
ka feSet b
raID of RATE PREF ON.
u l i
6. Enter a Parameter
s
i k H Search
7. Click
r a nat the bottom of the page.
t
arth non-
OTM displays the Parameter Sets results page.
K 8. Click the ID.
9. Click the Collapse All button at the bottom of the page.
Note the different sections of the parameter set page. You can set parameters for Bulk
Plan, Container Optimization, Multistop, and other areas as well. OTM ships with a
default setting for each parameter which you can override based on your business
processes.
10. Locate the Bulk Plan section and click the + sign next to BULK PLAN.
The Bulk Plan section expands and you now see all of the bulk plan parameters.
Note the first column defines the parameter name.
Note the second column defines the default value for the parameter.
Note the third column defines the override value if one is selected.
11. Scroll down to the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter.
Note there are 3 values available for the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter:
0.Do Not Use Preferred Rates This is the default value. If you do not set this
parameter to something other than the default value, OTM disregards your rate

preferences while planning shipments and looking up rates in the international rate
query.
1.Preferred Rates Only This tells OTM to only use preferred rates. Non-preferred
rates will not be considered during planning.
2.Preferred Rates If Available This tells OTM to use preferred rates if they are
specified. If preferred rates have not been specified, then OTM can consider non-
preferred rates during planning.

Once you create a new parameter set, you can assign it to your domain or user
preferences so OTM will use it during planning. If you are manually planning a
shipment, certain shipment actions enable you to select a parameter set.
Note: The online documentation contains a description for each parameter in the parameter
set. From the parameter set page, click the Help link at the top of the page. On the
parameter sets help page, click the link to view the List of Parameters topic.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Preference.
OTM displays the Rate Preference manager.

3. Enter a Rate Preference ID of AZ CA TL.
5. Enter a Lane ID of AZ-CA (already created).
6. Click l (list) next to the Rate Offering ID.
7. Mark the check box next to ATL9 TL.
8. Mark the check box next to BTT9 TL.
s a
) ha
OTM returns to the Rate Preference manager.
c om
10. Click Save to the right of Rate Offering ID field.
a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM displays the confirmation page. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Enabling a Rate Preference a n
In addition to creating a rate preference, you h
k OTMthyou
ulitell
must
is want to consider preferred rates

ik o us e
during planning.
r t
a> Powerh t > General > Parameter Sets.
( k
toft the page. n s eData
13. Click New at the bottom
m u l i c e
t
OTM displays the
n hiParameter
b le Set page.
a
14. Enter alParameter a
ik sfer of RATE PREF ON.
Set ID
u
H therBulk n Plan section, scroll to the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter.
k
15. Within
i t a
th Select a-Parameter Value of 2. Preferred Rates If Available.
Kar16. non
17. Click Finished at the top of the Parameter Set page.
Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences

Solution Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences
You successfully created a rate preference with an ID of AZ CA TL.
Enabling a Rate Preference

You successfully set the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter to 2. Preferred Rates If
Available.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality
Creating a Rate Quality
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Rates and Codes > Rate Quality
Factors.
2. Enter a Rate Quality ID of AZ-CA.

4. Click the ID.
You can define rate quality to help weigh rate offerings or rate records. This enables you
to:
Ensure that rates for a certain service provider do not qualify for a shipment or
Ensure a specific rate is chosen even if it does not result in the best planned cost
Note the Adjustment Percent and Adjustment Flat fields.
s a
To reduce the weighted cost, enter a percentage value between 0-99 or a negative
) ha
flat amount. By reducing the weighted cost, you are making service providers look
more attractive to OTM during planning. c om
a c le e
To increase the weighted cost, enter a percent value larger than 100 or a positive
@ or Guid
flat amount. By increasing the weighted cost, you are making service providers look
less attractive to OTM during planning. t
ut dent
i
th Stum
Assigning the Rate Quality to a Rate Record a n s or rate record. In this
Once you create a rate quality, you need to assign
h ulikit to ea rate
thioffering
example, you are assigning it to a rate record.
r t h ik o us
5. Click Contract and Rate Management
( k a se> Contract t Management > Rate Record.
t t
u of BTT9 n
eAZ-CA.
6. Enter a Rate Record ID
7. Click Search atth i m
the bottomle
l i c
of the page.
a n a b
8. Click the
u likID. sfer
H an tab.
kIn the Miscellaneous
9. Click the Attributes
i r
t h - t
Kar non section, note the Rate Quality ID assigned to this rate record.
Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality
With your rate preference, Big Texan Trucking and Antelope Line are the preferred carriers. Of
those two, even though Big Texan Trucking has a higher flat charge, they provide superior
service, so you want OTM to select them as the carrier instead of Antelope Line.

1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Rates and Codes > Rate Quality
Factors.
OTM displays the Rate Quality page.
4. Enter an Adjustment Flat of 250.00 USD.
Since you are specifying a negative amount, the rates to which you attach this rate quality
will look more attractive during planning in OTM. s a
5. Click Finished at the top of the page. ) ha
OTM displays a confirmation page. c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality

Solution Creating a Rate Quality
You successfully created a rate quality with an ID of AZ-CA.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating a Rate Quality

Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality
By assigning your rate quality to your Big Texan Trucking rate record, you are ensuring this rate
record looks more attractive during planning as compared to the rates for Antelope Line.
Assign a Rate Quality to a Rate Record


OTM displays the Rate Record results page.
4. Click the ID.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality

Solution Assigning a Rate Quality
Assign a Rate Quality to a Rate Record
You successfully assigned your rate quality to the BTT9 AZ-CA rate record.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Assigning a Rate Quality

Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates
Querying for Truckload Rates
1. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle taskbar.
2. Ensure that Rates is selected in the Find drop-down list.
3. In the Ship From section, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC.

4. In the Ship To section, enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE.
Location data is required for OTM to find your rates.
5. In the Additional Constraints section, enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT
TRAILERS COMPAT.
OTM should return both your Big Texan Trucking rate and your Antelope Line rate.
7. Enter the results of the rate query below:
s a
Field Enter Your Results ) ha
Rate Offering ID for c om
ATL9
a c le e
@ or Guid
Cost
t
ut dent
i m
h Stu
a ntResults
uli e this
Field Enterk
Your
Rate Offering ID for h
ik o us
BTT9 r t
a se th
Cost (
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
Querying for Rates
anInquiry
likNew e raatbthe bottom of the results page.
8. Click u the
H raFrom n s f
9. ik
In the Ship t section, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC.
rt h n -
a 10. Inntheo Ship To section, enter a Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE.
K Location data is required for OTM to find your rates.
OTM should return both your Big Texan Trucking rate and your Antelope Line rate.
Rate Offering ID for
ATL9
Cost

BTT9
Cost
Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates

Solution Querying for Truckload Rates
You successfully queried for rates.

OTM displays the following results:

Rate Offering ID for ATL9 TL
ATL9
Cost 550.00 USD

s a
) ha
Rate Offering ID for BTT9 TL
BTT9
Cost 600.00 USD c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM displays the following results:
t
ut dent
i m
h Stu
tResults
Field
a n
Enter Your
ATL9 TLhul
ik this
i k u s e
ATL9
t h
ar550.00 to
Cost ( k
tt cens e USD
u
im le li
t h
l i k an Field
e r ab Enter Your Results
n f
HuRateraOffering
s ID for BTT9 TL
i k t
arth non-
BTT9
K Cost 600.00 USD
Solution Querying for Truckload Rates

Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than
Truckload
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than Truckload
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles
Viewing an Existing Weight Break Profile
1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Rates and Codes > Rate Unit
Break Profiles.
2. Enter a Rate Unit Break Profile ID of LTL WEIGHT BREAKS.

4. Click the ID.
This is an example of a rate unit break defining a weight break. There are a total of 6 bands
and each contains a maximum weight. For example, the rate unit break ID of 00501-01000
is a weight range from 501 LB to 1000 LB.
Creating a Weight Break Profile

5. Click New at the top of the page.
s a
6. Click the Lookup Type drop-down list.
) ha
Note the three lookup types:
c om
c le e
CONTINUOUS RANGE Specified by min values OTM matches an actual value to a
a
or Guid
range between the break values you define where the range is defined as an inclusive
@
minimum. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
CONTINUOUS RANGE Specified by max values OTM matches an actual value to
a n
a range between the break values you define where the range is defined as an
inclusive maximum.
h ulik e this

h ik o us
LOOKUP EXACT VALUE OTM matches an actual value to the exact value defined in
r t
the break value field.
( k a se t
u tt cen
7. Select a Lookup Type of CONTINUOUS RANGE Specified by max values.
t h i m e li
8. Click the Data Type drop-down list.
l
i k an erab
There are different data types available including UNIT OF MEASURE. The data type
l
H u nsf
determines the type of rate unit break you are creating.
rt h ik n-tra
9. Select a Data Type of UNIT OF MEASURE.
Ka no
10. Click the UOM Type drop-down list.
Depending on the data type selected, you may be able to select a UOM type. By selecting a
data type of UNIT OF MEASURE, you must also specify the UOM type.
11. Select a UOM Type of WEIGHT.
Note the Rate Unit Break ID. This must be unique across all rate unit break profiles in
your domain.
Note the Break Value. Depending on the lookup type selected, enter the rate unit break
as a minimum, maximum, or exact value.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating
Rate Records
Viewing a Base Rate Offering
2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of PUBLISHED LTL.

4. Click the ID.
Since the rate offering is in a different domain, OTM displays the Rate Offering view page.
Note the Service Provider ID. Since many service providers offer discounts off of this
published rate, you can leave the Service Provider ID blank. Each master rate will have
a specific service provider.
Note the Offering Type. You define published LTL contracts as LTL BASE which a
s
) ha
shows as LTL BASE TARIFF. This is the only offering type that does not require you to
enter a service provider.
c om
Creating a Base Rate Record
a c le e
5. Click Actions > Contract and Rate > Change Rates > Create Rate
@ orRecord.
G uid
OTM displays the Lane Info tab. t
ut dent
6. Enter a Rate Record ID of DEMO PUBLISHED LTLtRATE. i m
h Stu
a n
ulik e this
7. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of COUNTRY.
8. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy ofCOUNTRY. h
ik o uGeo s Hierarchy. Typically these are broader
Note the Source Geo Hierarchy and r t h t
Destination
t (karatenthan
geographical areas for the base
t se for theandmaster rates. For example, your base
rates could have a geouhierarchy
i m l i c e
of state-state your master rates could use 3-digit US
zip codes.
a n th able
lik satfethe
9. Click Attributes
u r bottom of the page.
i OTM
k H displays
r a nthe Attributes tab.
t
th Enterona -Source Geography Country Code ID of USA.
r10.
a
K 11. Enter n a Destination Geography Country Code ID of USA.
13. Click Add A Cost.
14. In the Conditions section, select a Basis of Ship Unit Line Item NMFC Class.
15. Select an Operator of =.
16. Enter a Value(s) of 60.0 for the NMFC Class.
Note the conditional rule of Ship Unit Line Item NMFC Class = 60.0. OTM can only use this
rate cost if the items on the order have an NMFC Class of 60.0.
17. In the Charge section, select a Cost Type of Profile.
This lets OTM know that you want to use a rate unit break profile. The Rates page
refreshes to show additional fields.
18. Select a Rate Unit Break Profile ID 1 of LTL WEIGHT BREAKS.
19. Enter a Selector of Shipment Total Weight.
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records
20. Select a Basis of Shipment Total Weight.
21. Enter a Unit of 100 LB.
To define this as a per cwt rate, enter a basis Shipment Total Weight, a unit of 100 and a
unit of measure of LB.
22. Click Edit Unit Breaks to add the costs for each weight band.
23. For the Max 500 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 4.00 USD.
29. Click Save at the bottom of the Rate Unit Break page.
30. Click Save at the bottom of the Rates page.
s a
31. Close the Rate Record page.
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records
Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate
Records
Viewing a Master Rate Offering
2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of LON9 LTL.

4. Click the ID.
Note the Offering Type. For discount rates off of a published rate, you select LTL
MASTER.
Note the Service Provider ID. You must enter the service provider for which this
contract is valid.
s a
) ha
c om
Note the Base Rate Offering. This defines the published rate for which the service provider
is offering a discount.
a c le e
Viewing a Master Rate Record
@ or Guid
6. Click Actions at the top of the page.
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
7. Click OK in the message box.
a n
8. Click Contract and Rate > View > Show Related
u lik Ratet is
hRecords.
h
ik viewopage.e
9. Click Edit at the top of the Rate Record
r t h t us
(kaandnDestination
t t
Note the Source Geo Hierarchy
u e se Geo Hierarchy. Typically, this is more
specific than what iism l
defined on i c
the base rate.
10. Click the Rate a n th tab.ble
Costs a
OTM u lik the
displays s f er Costs tab.
Rate
i H anpencil icon) to the right of the Description field.
kClick Edit-tr(the
t h
11.
r nodisplays n
Ka OTM the Rates page.
Note the Cost Type. The cost type of Discount tells OTM to apply the specified
discount to the rate.
In the Charge section, note the Apply Discount Of field. OTM calculates a total cost of
80% of the published rate for this lane.
12. Close the Rates page.
Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate Records

Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings
Creating a Master Rate Offering

3. Enter an Offering ID of LON9 LTL.
4. Select an Offering Type of LTL - MASTER.
5. Enter a Service Provider ID of LON9 (already created).
6. Enter a Rate Service ID of LTL AZ CA (already created).
7. Select a Transport Mode of LTL.
s a
) ha
c om
11. Enter a Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP ONLY.
a c le e
12. Enter a Base Rate Offering of PUBLISHED LTL (already created).
@ or Guid
13. Click Finished at the top of the page. t
ut dent
OTM displays the confirmation page. i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings

Solution Creating Master Rate Offerings
You successfully created a master rate offering with an ID of LON9 LTL.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Master Rate Offerings

Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records
Creating a Master Rate Record
OTM displays the rate offering search page. Whenever you create a new rate record, you
have to associate your rate record with a rate offering.
3. Enter a Rate Offering ID of LON9 LTL (from previous exercise).
6. Enter a Rate Record ID of LON9 850-921.
s a
7. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of USZIP3.
) ha
8. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of USZIP3.
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
10. Enter a Source Geography Postal Code of 850. t
ut dent
11. Enter a Destination Geography Postal Code of 921. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. h
ik o us
13. Click Add A Cost. r t
a se th
(
tt cen
OTM displays the Rates page. k
i m u li
14. Select a Cost Type of Discount.
t h l e
l i k an erab
15. Enter an Apply Discount Of of 20 %.
u nsf
H
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Querying for Rates

18. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle taskbar.
19. Select a Find option of Rates.
20. Enter the Ship From Location ID of PHOENIX DC.
21. Enter the Ship To Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE.
Location data is required for OTM to find your rates.
22. Scroll down to the Transport Modes section.
23. Enter a Transport Mode ID of LTL.
24. Click Save to the far right of the Transport Modes grid.
25. Scroll down to the Commodities section which is at the very bottom of the page.
26. Select a Flexible Commodity Qualifier of NMFC_CLASS.
27. Enter a Commodity Code of 60.0.
28. Enter a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET.

29. Enter a Ship Unit Count of 1.
32. Click Save to the far right of the Commodities grid.

LON9
Cost
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Creating Master Rate Records
Creating a Master Rate Record
You successfully created a master rate record with an ID of LON9 850-921.
Querying for Rates


Rate Offering ID for LON9 LTL
LON9
Cost 121.28 USD
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Master Rate Records

Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries
Viewing an Itinerary
1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary Manager.
2. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP.

4. Click the ID.
Note the Perspective. This determines whether OTM can use this itinerary for buy
shipments, sell shipments, or both (ALL).
Note the Itinerary Type.
Active means the itinerary is used in shipment planning.
Inactive means the itinerary is not used in shipment planning.
Manual means the itinerary should only be used when running certain shipment
s a
actions.
) ha
om
Note the Source Geo Hierarchy and the Destination Geo Hierarchy. These define the
c
general start and end information of a lane.
a c le e
or Guid
Note the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box. This must be marked for OTM to build a multi-
@
stop shipment. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
In the Details section, you can limit the use of this itinerary by requiring an order to be
within certain weight and volume limits.
a n
5. Click the Lane Definitions tab.
h ulik e this

t h ik o us
Note that the fields on this tab change depending on the source and destination geo
r
k a se t
hierarchies selected on the Parameters tab. For example, if you selected a source geo
(
tt cen
hierarchy of POSTAL_CODE on the Parameters tab, OTM displays a Postal Code field
u
t h i m l e li
on the Lane Definitions tab.

l i k an erab
Note the Source and Destination Geography Province Code fields. In this example, the
H u nsf
source geography province code is AZ and the destination geography province code is
rt h ik n-tra
CA. This itinerary will only be used to plan shipments from Arizona to California.
Ka no
6. Click the List Legs tab.
7. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Mode Profile ID field.
The leg details page allows you to limit the use of this multi-stop itinerary. Most
commonly, you want to limit its use to only those transport modes that can be used for
multi-stop shipments.
Note the Sequence Number. This indicates in what order a shipment would travel
through multiple legs.
Note the Primary check box. For multi-leg itineraries, mark the most important leg as
primary.
Note the Equipment Assignment Type. This controls how OTM makes equipment
assignments for this leg.
Optimize Equipment allows OTM to choose the appropriate equipment for the leg of
the shipment.
Re-use Equipment allows OTM to use the same equipment that was selected for
previous leg. You should not select Re-use Equipment for the first leg in an itinerary.
No Equipment allows OTM to not assign equipment to the shipment.

In the Compatibility section, note the Mode Profile ID. OTM can only use rates that
match the transport modes in this profile.
Note the Equipment Group Profile ID. OTM can only use equipment groups matching
the equipment groups in the profile.
Querying for Route and Rate

8. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle toolbar.

There are two options available at the top of the page in the Find drop-down list:
Rates When selected, OTM only considers direct rates between the ship from and
ship to locations.
Rate And Route When selected, OTM first finds valid itineraries and then looks for
rates that meet the requirements specified on the itinerary.
9. Select a Find option of Rate And Route.
10. Enter a Date Deliver By of today's date plus 3 months.
s a
11. Enter a Ship From Location ID of PHOENIX DC. ) ha
12. Enter a Ship To Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE.
c om
13. Enter a Transport Mode ID of LTL.
a c le e
14. Click Save to the right of the Transport Mode ID field.
@ or Guid
15. Select a Flexible Commodity Qualifier of NMFC_CLASS.
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
16. Enter a Commodity Code of 60.0.
a n
h ulik e this
17. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET.
18. Enter a Ship Unit Count of 1.
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
tt cen
u
t h i m l e li
21. Click Save to the right of the Value field.
k an erab
l i
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries
Creating a Multi-stop Itinerary
OTM displays the Parameters tab.

4. Select the Perspective of Buy.
5. Select the Itinerary Type of Active.
6. Select the Source Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
7. Select the Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
8. Mark the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box.
9. Click Lane Definitions at the bottom of the page.
s a
OTM displays the Lane Definitions tab.
) ha
10. Enter the Source Geography Province Code of AZ.
c om
a c le e
12. Click List Legs at the bottom of the page.
@ or Guid
OTM displays the List Legs tab. t
ut dent
13. Click New Leg in the middle of the page. i m
th Stu
a n
OTM displays the Leg details page.
h ulik e this
14. Enter Sequence Number of 1.
r t h ik o us
15. Mark the Primary check box.
( k a se t
tt cen
16. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Optimize Equipment.
u
t h i m l e li
17. In the Compatibility section, select the Mode Profile ID of LAND.
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
OTM returns to the List Legs tab.
Ka no
Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries

Solution Creating Multi-stop Itineraries
You successfully created an itinerary with an ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Multi-stop Itineraries

Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates
Tasks
Querying for Rates

There are two options in the Find drop-down list on the Ask Oracle About Rates page:
Rates: Used for direct shipments between one pickup and one delivery point.
Rate and Route: In addition to rate data, this option also uses the itinerary to find the
appropriate rate.
Field Enter This Data
Find drop-down list Rate and Route
Ship From Location ID PHOENIX DC
s a
) ha
Ship To Location ID SAN DIEGO STORE
Transport Mode ID LTL
c om
Click Save
a c le e
Flexible Commodity NMFC_CLASS
@ or Guid
Qualifier t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Commodity Code 60.0
a n
Transport Handling 4X4 PALLET
h u lik this
Unit i k u s e
h
ar1t se to
Ship Unit Count
( k
tt c4000 n LB
Weight
m u l i e
n t hi ble 1 CU FT
lika sfera
Volume
u
H ran
Click Save to far right of Commodities grid
i k -t
Karth nonClick Search at the bottom of the page
1. Enter the results of the rate query below (click the + icon for more details):
Itinerary ID
Transport Mode
Service Provider ID
Rate Offering
Total Actual Cost
Querying for Rates

Find drop-down list Rate and Route
Ship From Location ID PHOENIX DC

Ship To Location ID SAN DIEGO STORE
Rate Offering ID BTT9 TL
Transport Handling 4X4 PALLET
Unit
Ship Unit Count 1
Weight 20000 LB
Volume 2 CU FT
Click Save
Click Search
Field Enter Your Results s a
Itinerary ID ) ha
c om
Transport Mode
a c le e
Service Provider ID
@ or Guid
Total Actual Cost t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Querying Route and Rates
You successfully queried the following routes and rates.
Querying for Rate

Itinerary ID AZ-CA MULTISTOP

Transport Mode LTL
Service Provider ID LON9
Rate Offering LON9 LTL
Querying for Rates s a

Field Enter Your Results ) ha
Itinerary ID AZ-CA MULTISTOP c om
a c le e
Transport Mode TL
@ or Guid
Service Provider ID BTT9 t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Querying Route and Rates

Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases
Creating an Order Base with Line Items
1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base.
2. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1.

4. Click the ID.
5. Click the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE.
OTM displays the Order Configuration manager.
will be entered with lines or with ship units. In this example, Line is selected which
s a
) ha
means this order release will be entered with lines.

the line item. This is specified in the Releasing Logic field. c om
In addition, this order configuration specifies to automatically create one ship unit for
a c le e
@ or Guid
Note the Ship Unit Creation field which indicates that OTM will automatically create the
ship units from the entered line items when the order release created (saved for the
first time). t
ut dent
6. Close the Order Configuration manager. i m
th Stu
a n
7. Click the Line Item tab.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
8. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Packaged Item ID of CRACKERS.
a se t
Note the Packaged Item ID and Item ID fields. One of these fields must be specified. If
( k
tt cen
you specify an item ID, an auto assign rule should be configured to automatically set
u
t h m
the packaged item ID.
i l e li

l i k an erab
Note the Total Package Count. Specify the packaged item you want to ship and the
H u nsf
number of those packaged items. Depending on how you defined your packaged item,
rt h ik n-tra

you can override the values for packaging unit and transport handling unit.
no
Note the Source Location ID and Destination Location ID fields. Each line item within
Ka the order base can have its own set of source and destination locations.
Note the Shippable check box. When this check box is marked, OTM releases the full
amount in this line item.
Note the Net Weight and Net Volume fields. Any values you enter here override the
weights and volumes defined on the packaged item.
Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it is
important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit
time.
Note the Released Weight, Released Volume, Released Count, and Quantity
Remaining fields. OTM displays how much of your order base line item has already
been released. You can see the same information, just below, in the Release
Instruction section.
9. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the existing release instruction.
Note the Release Instruction drop-down list. You can release by item count, weight, or
volume.

Note the Allow Releasing check box. Mark Allow Releasing for OTM to release
according to your instructions; alternatively, OTM saves your release instruction without
releasing.
You can also modify the source and destination locations as well as change pickup and
delivery dates.
10. Click Save at the bottom of the release instruction page.
11. Click Save at the bottom of the line item page.

You can ensure OTM builds shipments a certain way based on the constraints you define.
You can enter information specific to itineraries, rates, equipment, and service provider.
13. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the page.
You can specify a link between this order and other orders within OTM.
14. Click the Involved Parties tab.
s a
) ha
At a minimum, you must enter an involved party or contact with an involved party qualifier
ID of LOGISTICS for OTM to be able to send a tender notification.
15. Click the Other Attributes tab. c om
a c le e
Note the Accessorial and Special Service fields. You can specify additional services
required for this order.
@ or Guid
16. Click the Remarks tab. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Use this tab to specify text templates or remarks. Remarks allow you to log any extra
a n
ulik e this
information you may want to keep with the order base.
onik
h
Updating Pickup and Delivery Dates h
r t the Order
t o usReleases
To complete the guided demonstrations
t t (kalla three
n
laterein this scenario, you need to set the Early Pickup
sMULTISTOP order releases to current dates. To do
Dates and Late Delivery Dates u
im le li
on
c e
t h
this, complete the following:
n rab > Order Release > Order Release.
17. Click OrderaManagement
l i k fe ID of MULTISTOP.
uan OrdernsBase
18. EnterH
rt h
19. ikClick Search
n - tra at the bottom of the page.
K no the check boxes for all three order releases: MULTISTOP1-001, MULTISTOP2-001
a 20. Select
and MULTISTOP3-001.
22. On Order Release ID MULTISTOP1-001, enter an Early Pickup Date of today and a Late
Delivery Date of three months from today.
23. Click Next at the top of the page.
27. Click Finished at the top of the page to save the changes.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items
In addition to releasing from within the order base line item page, you can use an order base
line action to release line items.
Releasing an Order Base with Line Items

1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base Line.
To work with order bases defined with ship units, you can use Order Management >
Purchase Order > Order Base Ship Unit.
OTM displays the Order Lines results page.
s a
) ha
Note the actions Release Remaining Order Amount and Release Total Order Amount.
om
These actions quickly release all unreleased line item quantities or all line items in the order
base. c
le e
6. Click Order Management > Change Order > Release Lines. a c
@ or Guid
You can manually release all or part of your order base lines. In this example, all originally
ordered crackers have already been released. t
ut dent
7. Close the Order Base Line page. i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items

Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items
Creating the First Order Base with Line Items
OTM displays the Order Base tab.

5. Select a Reference Number Qualifier of PO.
6. Enter a Reference Number of 54321.
7. Click Save to the right of the Reference Number field.
s a
9. Click New Line Item.
) ha
10. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CRACKERS (previously created).
c om
a c le e
12. Enter a Source Location ID of PHOENIX DC (previously created).
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
13. Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE (previously created).
14. Mark the Shippable check box. i m
th Stu
a n
15. Enter a Net Weight of 26700 LB.
h ulik e this
16. Enter a Net Volume of 400 CU FT.
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
17. Select an Early Pickup Date of todays date.
tt cen
18. Select a Late Delivery Date of todays date plus 3 months.
u
t h i m l e li
Note: Since there are a number of fields on the order base, make sure you populate the
l i k an erab
correct fields.
u nsf
H
r h ik n-tra
t
Ka no
OTM displays the Order Base Links tab.
24. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX DC PLANNER (previously created).
25. Select the Communication Method of BY CONTACT.
26. Select the Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
Creating the Second Order Base with Line Items

29. Click Create Another. (Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base)


37. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES (previously created).
40. Enter a Destination Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE (previously created).
41. Mark the Shippable check box.
s a
43. Enter a Net Volume of 200 CU FT. ) ha
c om
a c le e
or Guid
@
correct fields. t
ut dent
46. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
48. h
ik o us
Click Constraints at the bottom of the page.
r t
a se t
OTM displays the Constraints tab. h
49. (
tt cenk
Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the page.
i m u li
t h l e
50.
l i k an erab
Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page.
H u nsf
rt h
51. ik n-tra
Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX DC PLANNER (previously created).
Ka 52. no Select the Communication Method of BY CONTACT.
53. Select the Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
Creating the Third Order Base with Line Items

56. Click Create Another. (Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base)

64. Enter a Packaged Item ID of MOTOR OIL (previously created).
67. Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE (previously created).
68. Mark the Shippable check box.

70. Enter a Net Volume of 200 CU FT.
correct fields.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
77. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Involved Parties tab. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
78. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX DC PLANNER (previously created).
79. h
ik o us
Select the Communication Method of BY CONTACT.
80. r t
a se th
Select the Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS.
81. (
tt cenk
Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party Contact field.
82. i m u li
Click Finished at the top of the page.
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Creating Order Bases with Line Items
Creating an Order Base with Line Items
You successfully created an order base with an ID of MULTISTOP1.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating Order Bases with Line Items

Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases

Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases
Bulk Planning Order Releases
2. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP.

4. Mark the check box in the header to select the three order releases.
5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan Buy.
6. Select the Parameter Set ID of RATE PREF ON.
7. Note the What-If Scenario check box (do not select it). If selected, OTM only runs a test
bulk plan and does not build any shipments. This can be used for testing.
Note: For this demonstration, do not select the What-If Scenario check box!
s a
8. Click OK at the bottom of the page.
) ha
c om
9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page to see if the bulk plan has finished running.

c
When you see an end time, OTM has finished running the bulk plan.
a le e
10. Note the Bulk Plan ID.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
When you perform a bulk plan, a unique bulk plan ID is created for the bulk plan. This
i m
th Stu
bulk plan ID allows you to view the bulk plan at any time via the Operational Planning >
a n
Planning Results > Shipment Planning menu option.
11. Click the Parameter Set ID.
h ulik e this
t h ik o us
This shows the set of parameters that was used to process this bulk plan. Parameters
r
k a se t
determine how various processes behave within OTM.
(
u tt cen
12. Click the Collapse All button at the bottom.
t h i m l e li
Note how many different sections there are.
l i k an erab
u nsf
13. Click the plus sign (+) next to Bulk Plan.
H
rt h ik n-tra
These parameters are specific to bulk planning.
a no
14. Scroll down and click the plus sign (+) next to Multistop.
K These parameters are specific to mutlistop scenarios.
15. Note the second parameter Multistop Config ID.
16. Click the link for Multistop Default in the Default Value column.
The Logic Configuration page for a type of Multistop opens. These are additional
parameters for multi-stop shipment planning.
Logic configuration is a collection of related parameters and algorithms used by OTM.
A configuration can handle different scenarios and be shared by different parameter
sets.
17. Click the Help link in the upper right-hand corner of the page.
This topic shows the navigation from the menu. You dont have to start at the Bulk Plan
results page. You could also view logic configuration by going to Shipment
Management > Power Data > General > Logic Configuration.
Note the different logic configuration types such as container optimization, driver
configuration and network routing.
Click on any of these help links to view more about that logic configuration type and its
associated parameters.

18. Click the Multistop help link.
You see more information about each multi-stop logic configuration parameter.
19. Close the Help topic.
20. Close the Logic Configuration page.
21. On the Bulk Plan page, note the Results tab. The Results tab of the Bulk Plan Manager
allows you to view informational attributes about the bulk plan results such as:
Start and end time of the bulk planning process
Number of orders selected for bulk planning
Number of orders that were planned onto shipments
Number of orders that were unassigned and re-planned for better shipping
opportunities
Number of order movements created, planned and failed.
Number of shipments created
s a
Number of orders that failed to plan ) ha
Totals for costs, weight, volume, and distance.
c om
22. Click the Metrics tab.
a c le e
The Metrics tab has several sections:
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
The Bulk Plan Level Metrics section summarizes metrics derived from the total bulk
plan. i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
The Mode Metrics section displays summary statistics for shipments based on
transportation mode. Each mode appears on a separate row with summary values.
r t h ik o us
The Service Provider Metrics section displays summary statistics for shipments
( k a se t
tt cen
based on service provider. Each service provider appears on a separate row with
u
summary values.
t h i m l e li
an erab
23. Click the Performance tab.
l i
u nsfk
The Performance tab contains bulk plan level metrics and milestone metrics.
H
ik n-tra
For more details on the expanded Bulk Plan Manager, see the OTM 5.5 CU4: OTM
rt h
no
Bulk Plan Functional Overview Transfer of Information (TOI) session.
Ka 24. Close the Bulk Plan Manager page.
Mapping Shipments
27. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP.
29. Mark the check box in the header to select the both shipments.
30. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments.
OTM displays the map with your shipments on it.
31. Click the plus sign (+) button in the left-hand corner to zoom in.
OTM displays the map with all of your shipments.
Note how your multi-stop shipment is one shipment with many stops and not an
individual shipment between each location.

32. Close the map page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases
OTM displays the order release finder page.
2. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTI.

4. Mark the check boxes next to your three Order Releases.
5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan - Buy.
OTM displays the Shipment Planning page.
6. Select the Parameter Set ID of RATE PREF ON.
7. Click OK.
s a
OTM displays the Bulk Plan page.
) ha
8. Wait a few seconds for the bulk plan process to finish.
c om
9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page.
a c le e
or Guid
When you see a Status of COMPLETED and an end time, OTM has finished running the
@
bulk plan. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
10. Verify that all three orders were planned into shipments. Note the Orders Planned field and
a n
ulik e this
make sure this has 3 listed.
11. Click Actions > View > Shipments.
h
ik o us
t h
OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page with your shipments listed.
r
a se t
( k
12. Select the check boxes next to all shipments.
tt cen
m u li
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
14. Answer the following. View the shipments to find all information.
H u nsField f Enter Your Results
t h ra
ik nTL-tShipment ID
a r n o
K Transport Mode ID TL
Total Actual Cost
(expand the More
section)
Total Weighted Cost
Service Provider ID

LTL Shipment ID
Transport Mode ID LTL
Total Actual Cost
(expand the More
section)

Service Provider ID
15. Close the Buy Shipment View page.

16. Close the Bulk Plan Manager page.
Mapping Your Shipments

17. On the Order Release results page, ensure the check boxes next to all order releases
you used during this bulk plan are selected.
18. Click Actions > Order Management > Map > Map Related Shipments.
19. Click the plus sign (+) button in the left-hand corner to zoom in.
Note how your multi-stop shipment is one shipment with many stops and not an individual
s a
) ha
shipment between each location.
20. Close the map shipment page.
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Bulk Planning Order Releases
Bulk Planning your Order Releases
OTM should have created 2 shipments during the bulk plan process.
TL Shipment ID nnnnn
Transport Mode ID TL
Total Weighted Cost 455.00 USD
Service Provider ID BTT9
s a
) ha
LTL Shipment ID nnnnn
c om
Transport Mode ID LTL a c le e
@ or Guid
Total Actual Cost 122.19 USD t
ut dent
Service Provider ID LON9 i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Bulk Planning Order Releases

Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops

Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops
Re-sequencing Stops
2. Click the Transport tab.
3. Enter a Mode of TL.

4. Click the Advanced tab.
7. Mark the check box next to the shipment. If there is more than one shipment, click the ID
of the shipment with the highest sequential number.
s a
OTM displays the Shipment View page.
) ha
9. Scroll to the bottom of the page.
c om
a c le e
Note the location with a stop number of 3. It should be LOS ANGELES STORE LOS
ANGELES CA 90043.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
10. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Shipment Stops > Resequence
Stops. i m
th Stu
11. Click the option button next to stop number 3.
a n
12. Click Move Up.
h ulik e this
13. Click Ok.
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
14. From the Resequence Stops page under the Affected Shipment header, click the ID for the
shipment. u tt cen
t h i m l e li
15. Scroll to Shipment Stops section at the bottom of the page.
i k an erab
Note the location with a stop number of 3. It should now be SAN DIEGO STORE SAN
l
H u nsf
DIEGO CA 92101.
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
17. Close the Resequence Stops page.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops

Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops
Re-sequencing Stops
Original Planned Shipment
San Diego Los Angeles

Phoenix DC
General Store General Store
Shipment after Re-sequenced Stops
Phoenix DC Los Angeles San Diego

s a
In this practice, you have been notified that the Los Angeles store has dipped into their
) ha
c om
safety stock of chocolate cookies, and they need their delivery as soon as possible to
is the first destination stop. a c le e

replenish their inventory. You need to re-sequence the stops so that the Los Angeles store
1. @
Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments.or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
OTM displays the Shipment tab of the buy shipment search page.
th Stu
2. Click the Transport tab.
a n
OTM displays the Transport tab.
h ulik e this
3. Enter a Mode of TL.
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
OTM displays the Advanced tab.
5. t h i m l e li
Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP.
6. i k an erab
Click Search at the bottom of the page.
l
H u nsf
rt
7.h ik n-tra
Mark the check box next to the shipment.
Ka 8. no
Click View at the top of the page.
9. Scroll to the bottom of the page to view the shipment stops.
How many stops are on
this shipment?
What location is
currently stop 3?
10. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Shipment Stops > Resequence
Stops.
OTM displays the Resequence Stops page in a new window.
11. Click the option button next to Stop Number 3, LOS ANGELES STORE.
12. Click Move Up.

Note that the Los Angeles Store has been moved up to stop number 2.
13. Click OK.
OTM displays the Shipment Resequence page.
14. Click the shipment ID under Affected Shipments.
OTM displays the Shipment View page in a new window.
15. Scroll to the bottom of the Buy Shipment view page.

What location is
currently stop 3?
16. Close the Shipment View page.

17. Close the Shipment Resequence Stops page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Re-sequencing Stops
Re-sequencing Stops
You successfully re-sequenced the stops so the shipment is now:
Los Angeles San Diego

Phoenix DC

How many stops are on 3
this shipment?
What location is Los Angeles Store
currently stop 3? s a
) ha
c om
Question le e
Enter Your Answers
a c
What location is San Diego Store
@ or Guid
currently stop 3? t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Re-sequencing Stops

Tendering Shipments
OTM displays the Shipment tab of the buy shipments search page.

OTM displays the Advanced tab.
5. Mark the check box next to each of the shipments.
6. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender > Secure Resources.
OTM displays the Secure Resources confirmation page.
s a
OTM tenders the shipments to the service provider assigned to each shipment.
) ha
7. Close the Secure Resources confirmation page.
c om
8. Log out of OTM.
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

You successfully tendered your TL and LTL shipments to their respective service providers.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider
Declining a Tender as the Service Provider
In this practice, you will log into OTM as the BTT9 service provider. BTT9 cannot handle this
shipment and will decline the tender. OTM then re-tenders to the next best service provider.
1. Log in to OTM as SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-BTT9 using password CHANGEME. (For
example, SERVPROV.CORE102-BTT9.)
2. Click Online Booking/Tendering.
OTM displays the tender response search page.
OTM displays the Online Booking/Tendering results page.
4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Online Booking/Tendering page.
s a
) ha
5. Write down the following information.
c om
Tender Offer Status
a c le e
@ or Guid
Respond By
t
ut dent
Tender Acceptance i m
th Stu
Status
a n
h ulik e this
6. Click Decline at the bottom of thetpage.
r h ik o us
( k aShipment e t
OTM displays the Decline This
u ttCode cofeCPU s page.
n or any other code you prefer.
7. Enter a Decline Reason
m
i bottom
hthe l i
8. Click Finished
a n t
at
a b le of the page.
uoflikservice
OTM automatically f r
ere-tenders the shipment to another service provider after your first
H
choice
an s provider declined.
t h i kLog out -oftrOTM.
Kar non
9.
Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider

Solution Declining Tender as Service Provider
Declining a Tender as the Service Provider
You successfully logged into OTM as the BTT9 service provider and declined the tender.

Tender Offer Status OUTSTANDING
Respond By +2H from tender sent
Tender Acceptance NO RESPONSE
Status
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Declining Tender as Service Provider

Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner
Viewing a Message in the OTM Message Center
1. Log in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. (For example, CORE101.ADMIN.)
2. Click Message Center at the top of the page.
OTM displays the Messages search page.

OTM displays the Messages results page.
4. Look for a Message Title saying that the Tender for Shipment BTT9-##### DECLINED.
5. Click the ID to view the message.
OTM displays the message.
6. Scroll down to view more of the message.
s a
) ha
Viewing the Status of Shipments
c om
a c le e
8. Click the Order Base tab.
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Order Base tab. t
ut dent
9. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTI. i m
th Stu
10. Click l (list) next to Order Base ID. a n
OTM displays the Order Bases results page.
h ulik e this
t h ik o us
11. Mark the check boxes next to the three order bases you just created.
r
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
OTM returns to the Order Base tab.
l i k an erab
13. In the drop-down list to the right of Order Base ID, select a Conditional Operator of One Of.
u nsf
H
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
15. Click the ID of the shipment with a mode of TL (this is the shipment that BTT9 declined).
Note the status type of SECURE RESOURCES.
The Status Value should still be SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED since OTM
automatically re-tendered the shipment to another service provider when the tender
was declined.
18. Note the following:
Shipment ID
Service Provider
(Identification tab)
Reference Number

(Qualifier=BM)
Total Actual Cost
(Financials tab)
Planned Cost
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner
Viewing the Status of Shipments
You successfully viewed the status of your shipments.
Shipment ID Nnnnn
Service Provider ATL9
Reference Number ATL9-nnnnnn
(Qualifier=BM)
(Financials tab)
Planned Cost 705.00 USD
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner

Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status
Accepting Tenders as the Transport Planner
1. From the Shipment edit page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender > Accept
Tender.
OTM displays the Accept This Shipment page.

2. Note the Pickup Date Time.
3. Click Finished at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays a confirmation page.
4. Close the Accept Tender page.
Viewing the Status of Shipments as the Transport Planner

s a
) ha
6. Click the Order Base tab.
c om
a c le e
or Guid
Note the color of the indicator next to the TL shipment. It should now be green, since the
@
t
tender has been accepted. This indicator was set by the automation agent previously
ut dent
created.
i m
th Stu
n
9. Look for the Status column and note the status is now set to SECURE
a
RESOURCES_ACCEPTED.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status

Solution Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status
Accepting Tenders as the Transport Planner
As the transport planner, you successfully accepted the shipment tender.
Viewing the Status of Shipments as the Transport Planner

You noted the indicator color is set to green and viewed the shipment status of SECURE
RESOURCES_ACCEPTED.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status

Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment

Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations
Viewing a Public Location
1. Click on Shipment Management > Location Manager.
2. Enter a Location Name of BREMERHAVEN.
3. Select the conditional operator of Contains.

6. Click the ID of DEBRV.
When you view the details or try to edit a public location, the view page is displayed. This
page cannot be edited, only viewed.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations

Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations
Viewing a Shared Location
Lets check that you can access the location which is in a domain called SHAREDCORE to
which you have read only access.

What is the fixed stop time of
the location WARSAW
PLANT?
(Hint: Search for a Location ID
of WARSAW PLANT)
s a
) ha
Querying for Public Locations
om
Next, lets look for some information on locations located in the PUBLIC domain.
1. Click on Shipment Management > Location Manager. c
le e
a c
OTM displays the location search page.
@ or Guid
2. Enter a Location Name of BREMERHAVEN. t
ut dent
3. Select the conditional operator of Contains. i m
th Stu
4. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC. a n
h ulik e this
t
r h ik o us
( k a se t
You will be using the DEBRV location. If you are unable to find this location, please notify
your trainer. u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
Querying for Public Locations
H u nField s f Enter This Data
t h ikLocation
n - ra
tName HOUSTON
a r n o
K Conditional Operator Contains
Domain Name PUBLIC
You will be using the USHOU location. If you are unable to find this location, please notify
your trainer.
Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations

Solution Viewing Public Locations
Viewing a Location
You successfully determined the fixed stop time.
What is the fixed stop time of 1H

the location WARSAW
PLANT?
You successfully viewed both the PUBLIC DEBRV and USHOU locations.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing Public Locations

Lesson 38: Viewing Items
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 38: Viewing Items

Practice 1 - Viewing Items
Querying for Shared Items
1. Click on Order Management > Material Management > Item.
OTM displays the Items search page.
2. Enter an Item ID of T SHIRTS.

OTM displays the Items results page.
You will be using the T SHIRTS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your
trainer.
5. Click New Query.
s a
6. Enter an Item ID of SHORTS.
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
You will be using the SHORTS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your
trainer. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
9. Click New Query.
h
ik o us
10. Enter an Item ID of SOCKS.
r t
a se th
( k
tt cen
m u li
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
u nsf
You will be using the SOCKS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your
H
rt h ik n-tra
trainer.
Ka no
Practice 1 - Viewing Items

Solution Viewing Items
Viewing Items
You successfully viewed the T SHIRTS, SHORTS, and SOCKS items located in the
SHAREDCORE domain.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing Items

Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles
for Ocean
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean
Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles
for Ocean
Verifying Equipment Group and Equipment Group Profile

What is the effective weight
40FT OCEAN CONTAINER?
(Hint: Go to Shipment
Management > Equipment
Group.)
s a
What equipment groups are
) ha
part of the Equipment Group
c om
Profile 40 OCEAN
a c le e
COMPATIBLE?
@ or Guid
(Hint: Go to Shipment t
ut dent
Management > Equipment i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
Group Profile.)
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean
Solution Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles
for Ocean
Verifying Equipment Group and Equipment Group Profile
You successfully verified the following equipment:

What is the effective weight 44000.00 LB
40FT OCEAN CONTAINER?
What equipment groups are 40FT OCEAN CONTAINER
part of the Equipment Group
Profile 40 OCEAN
COMPATIBLE?
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean
Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for
Truckload Leg One
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for
Truckload Leg One
Verifying Service Provider and Rates

What is the Corporation ID for
the service provider BIS9?
(Go to Contract and Rate
Management > Service
Provider Manager. Then
search for BIS9 to view it.)
What is the response time
s a
) ha
when tendering to BIS9?
(Go to Business Process
Automation > Communication
c om
Management > Contacts.
a c le e
Then search on the BIS9
@ or Guid
contact and view it.) t
ut dent
In what currency is the BIS9 i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
TL Rate Offering defined?
(View the rate offering to
h
ik o us
determine the currency)
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One
Solution Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for
Truckload Leg One
What is the Corporation ID for BISON TRUCK COMPANY

BIS9?
What is the response time 2 H (hours)
when tendering to BIS9?
In what currency is the BIS9 EUR
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One
Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for
Vessel
Viewing a Vessel Rate Offering
Vessel rate offerings and rate records are set up similarly to other modes.
One difference on the rate offering is the rate service or how transit time is calculated. Vessel
rates use voyage schedules that you define in OTM.
2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of ACLU VESSEL.
4. Click the ID.
The following information was entered when the rate offering was created:
s a
Note the Offering Type of VESSEL
) ha
Note the Transport Mode of VESSEL-CO
c om
5. Click v (view) next to the Rate Service ID.
a c le e
or Guid
Note the Rate Service Type. In the rate service, you refer to a rate service type which
@
t
ut dent
in this example is VOYAGESCHEDULE. Your voyage schedules also refer to this rate
i m
service type linking your voyage schedules to your rate service.
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
Note the Voyage Service Type ID. In the rate service, you also define the associated
voyage service type which in this example is TAS-2. This voyage service type links to
h
ik o us
the voyage schedule in the Voyage Manager.
r t
a se th
6. Close the Rate Service page.
(
tt cenk
i m u
7. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Voyage.
li
t h l e
8. Enter a Voyage Service Type ID of TAS-2.
i k an erab
l
H u nsf
OTM displays the Voyages results page.
rt h ik n-tra
Note the Voyage Service Type ID which links this schedule to any rate service that also
Ka no
uses this voyage service type ID.
10. Click on any of the IDs.
Note the Vessel ID. You can associate a specific vessel to this voyage, for example,
vessel ID of SS FREIGHTER.
The voyage defines the origin(s) and destination(s) for the TAS-2 service type. In this
example, the location of DEBRV (Bremerhaven) has an activity of Depart which makes
it the origin. The location of USHOU (Houston) has an activity of Arrive which makes it
the destination.
Note the Activity Date for each location. The activity date specifies when the vessel will
arrive or depart at the location that you specified. OTM evaluates this date during
shipment planning to determine whether a voyage schedule can be used to build a
shipment. When a shipment is created, the activity date determines the shipment stop
dates/times.
You can define cutoff and recovery times (load and unload times) for the ocean move
in Shipment Management > Power Data > Location > Cutoff Recovery Times.
Deliveries need to be brought to the origin port a certain amount of time prior to a
voyage. This is known as cutoff time.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel
If the delivery does not arrive at the port before the cutoff time, it cannot be
accepted on the ship.
There is a certain amount of time that the delivery must wait at the destination
before it is ready. This is known as the recovery time.
Viewing a Vessel Rate Record

One way vessel carriers quote their rates is per container. No matter how the rates are quoted,
they are defined on the rate record.
12. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU DEU-USA.
OTM displays the Rate Records results page.
14. Click the ID.
15. Click the Rate Costs tab. s a
16. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the right of the Description field. ) ha
c om
This example shows a rate cost based on shipment total pieces of equipment as the
basis with a unit of 1.
a c le e
or Guid
So the actual rate cost is 545.00 USD per shipment total pieces of equipment of 1.
@
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel
Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel
Verifying the Service Provider
The service provider Atlantic Commerce Line Unlimited is public data. Query on the public
service provider ACLU.
2. Enter a Service Provider ID of ACLU.

You will be using the ACLU service provider. If you are unable to find this service provider,
please notify your trainer.
Creating a Vessel Rate Offering

Next, create a vessel rate offering with the following information: s a
4. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. ) ha
c om
OTM displays the Rate Header tab. a c le e
6. Enter an Offering ID of ACLU VESSEL.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
7. Select an Offering Type of VESSEL.
i m
th Stu
8. Enter a Service Provider ID of ACLU.
a n
h ulik e this
As soon as you click anywhere else on the page, the page refreshes.
r t h ik o us
9. Click n (new) next to the Rate Service ID.
( k a se t
OTM displays the Rate Service Header tab.
u tt cen
10. Enter a Rate Service ID of VOYAGE SERVICE.
t h i m l e li
11. Select a Rate Service Type of VOYAGESCHEDULE.
i k an erab
12. Click Details at the bottom of the page.
l
H u nsf
OTM displays the Rate Service Details tab.
rt h ik n-tra
13. Enter a Voyage Service Type ID of TAS-2.
Ka no
14. Click Save to the right of the Voyage Service Type ID field.
OTM returns to the Rate Header tab.
16. Select a Transport Mode of VESSEL-CO.
18. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018.
Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel

Solution Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel
You successfully created a vessel rate offering with an ID of ACLU VESSEL and a rate service
with an ID of VOYAGE SERVICE.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel
Creating a Vessel Rate Record
Create a vessel rate record with the following information. This rate is 545.00 USD per
container.
1. From the confirmation page that you saw in practice 1, mark the check box next to the rate
offering you just created.

2. Click Actions > Contract and Rate > Change Rates > Create Rate Record.
OTM displays the Lane Info tab and populates the Rate Offering ID field.
4. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of LOCATION.
5. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of LOCATION.
s a
) ha
7. Enter a Source Geography Location ID of DEBRV.
c om
8. Enter a Destination Geography Location ID of USHOU.
a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. t
ut dent
10. Click Add A Cost near the bottom of the page. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
h
11. Make sure that a Cost Type of Charge is selected.
ik o us
t h
Charge should be the default cost type.
r
a se t
( k
tt cen
m u li
13. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment.
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
14. Enter a Unit of 1.
u nsf
H
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel

Solution Creating a Rate Record for Vessel
You successfully created a rate record with an ID of ACLU DEU-USA.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating a Rate Record for Vessel

Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services

Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services
Accessorials and special services can be requested on the location, order base, order release,
and item.
They can also be requested on asset management objects like driver, power unit, etc. Refer to
the online help for using accessorials with asset management or Fleet Management.
Viewing on a Location
First, lets look at requesting accessorials and special services on a location.
4. Click the ID.
s a
) ha
At the bottom of the Roles tab, you can define accessorials and/or special services.
c om
Viewing on an Order Base a c le e
@
Next, lets look at requesting accessorials and special services on an order or base.
G uid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h u lik this
OTM displays the Order Bases results i k
page.
u s e
9. Click the ID.
h
art se to
( k
tt tab. cen
10. Click the Other Attributes
At the bottom ofh m u li tab, you can define accessorials and/or special
i OtherleAttributes
services. an
t the
ab
l i k
u an Order f e r
Hon a n s Release
i k
Viewing
th letsonlook r
-t at requesting accessorials and special services on an order release.
a rNext, n
K 11. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release.
12. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP1.
14. Click the ID.
15. Click the Other Attributes tab.
At the bottom of the Other Attributes tab, you can define accessorials and/or special
services.
You can specify a special service group, duration, and source/destination location.
These fields are reviewed in more detail in Guided Demonstration 3: Defining Special
Services.
Viewing on an Item
Finally, lets look at requesting accessorials and special services on an item.

17. Enter an Item ID of CRACKERS.
19. Click the ID.
20. Click the Accessorials tab.
On the Accessorials tab, you can define accessorials and/or special services.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials
You can define accessorial costs on the rate offering or rate record. Here, you view the terminal
handling accessorial charge on the rate record.
Viewing the Accessorial Code


4. Click the ID.
On the Accessorials tab, you define both accessorial codes and accessorial costs.
6. Click the Accessorial Code ID of TERM HNDLG.
s a
OTM displays the Accessorial Code view page.
) ha
c om

c le e
Note the Accessorial Code ID. When defining an accessorial, you first define the
a
accessorial code.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Note the Flow Thru check box. If you mark the Flow Thru check box and a buy
i m
shipment uses this accessorial, OTM also passes on the accessorial to the sell
th Stu
n
shipment to impact customer billing. In this instance, the accessorial cost applies to
a
h ulik e this
both the payment invoice and the customer bill. This way, you can pass on an
r t h ik o us
accessorial charge to a customer without adding an additional fee.

a se t
Note the Always Apply check box. If you mark the Always Apply check box, OTM
( k
tt cen
always applies the accessorial code without you having to request the accessorial code
u
t h m l e li
on an item, order base, order release, or location.
i

l i k an erab
Note the VAT Exempt check box. Mark the VAT Exempt check box if the accessorial is
H u nsf
tax exempt.
rt h ik n-tra
a no
K
Viewing the Accessorial Cost
Next, you define the cost associated with the terminal handling charge accessorial. There are
several constraints you can assign to the accessorial cost including effective dates and
calendars. The terminal handling charge in this example is 120.00 USD per piece of equipment.
10. Click the Accessorial Cost ID of TH.
OTM displays the Accessorial Cost view page.
The Accessorial Cost page is very similar to the Rate Cost page. In this example, the
following information is entered in the Accessorial Cost page:
Accessorial Cost ID of TH.
Cost Type of Charge is specified.
Amount of 120.00 USD.
Basis of Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment.
Unit of 1.

This example shows an additional cost of 120.00 USD per piece of equipment.
12. Close the Accessorial Cost page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services
Now that you have learned about defining accessorials, lets look at defining special services.
In this example, assign the special service to a rate record.
Viewing the Special Services Code

2. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU.
4. Click the ID of ACLU DEU-USA.
5. Click the Special Services tab.
If there is a cost associated with your special service, you define an accessorial code and
an accessorial cost for that special service.
s a
6. Click New Special Service.
) ha
OTM displays the Rate Record / Special Service Edit page.
c om
7. Click n (new) next to Special Service.
a c le e
OTM displays the Special Service page in a new window.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Note the Special Service ID. If the service provider offers this special service as part of
i m
th Stu
the base charge, you only need a special service ID.
a n
ulik e this
Note the Special Service Desc. If you record a special service description, it appears
h
as the shipment cost type on the Financials tab of the Shipment Manager when this
ik o us
r t
a se th
special service is applied to a shipment.
k
Note the Arbitrary check box. Select the Arbitrary check box to indicate that the special
(
tt cen
i m u
service is for tracking an ocean arbitrary.
li
t h e
The Special Service page contains many fields used with Oracle Fleet Management. This
l
l i k an erab
OTM 6.3 Core Competence class does not include details on the Oracle Fleet Management
u nsf
module. Please refer to the see the Oracle Transportation Management 6.0 Transfer of
H
rt h ik n-tra
Information Functional Overview - Special Services and Remarks .and the OTM online help
no
for details about these sections of the page.
Ka 8. Close the Special Service page.
Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services

Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record
Defining an Accessorial on a Rate Record
Define a 120.00 USD terminal handling accessorial charge per container on the vessel rate
record that you created previously.

4. Click the ID.
6. Click n (new) next to Accessorial Code ID.
s a
OTM displays the Accessorial Code page.
) ha
7. Enter an Accessorial Code ID of TERM HNDLG.
c om
8. Enter an Accessorial Code Description of TERM HANDLING.
a c le e
9. Mark the Always Apply check box.
@ or Guid
10. Click Finished at the top of the Accessorial Code page. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
OTM returns to the Accessorials tab and adds the new accessorial to the Accessorial Code
a n
ulik e this
ID field.

11. Click n (new) next to Accessorial Cost ID. h
ik o us
t h
OTM displays the Accessorial Cost page.
r
a se t
( k
12. Enter an Accessorial Cost ID of TH.
tt cen
m u li
13. Make sure a Cost Type of Charge is selected.
i
t h l e
l i k an erab
u nsf
15. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment.
H
rt h ik n-tra
16. Enter a Unit of 1.
Ka no
17. Click Finished at the top of the Accessorial Cost page.
OTM returns to the Accessorials tab and adds the new accessorial to the Accessorial Cost
ID field.
18. Click Save to the right of the Accessorial Cost ID field.
OTM displays a message regarding sharing accessorial costs across rates.
19. Click OK.
Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record

Solution Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record
You successfully defined an accessorial on the ACLU DEU-USA rate record.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record

Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final
Truckload Leg
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final Truckload Leg
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final
Truckload Leg

What is the response time

when tendering to COY9?
(Go to Business Process
Automation > Communication
Management > Contacts.
Then search on the COY9
contact and view it.)
In what currency is the COY9
s a
) ha
(View the rate offering to
c om
determine the currency)
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg
Solution Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final
Truckload Leg
What is the response time 2 H (hours)

when tendering to COY9?
In what currency is the COY9 USD
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg
Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates
Running a Truckload Rate Query
Find Rates
Date Deliver By Today's date plus 3 months

Ship From Location ID WARSAW PLANT
Ship to Location ID DEBRV
Transport Handling Unit LARGE BOX
Ship Unit Count 1
Weight 15000 KG
s a
Volume 1 CU FT
) ha
Click
c om
Save to the right of the Commodities grid.

Click Search a c le e
@ or Guid
OTM should return your BIS9 rate. t
ut dent
Enter the results of the rate query below: i m
th YourSResults
tu
a n
ulik e this
Field Enter
Rate Offering ID h
ik o us
Rate Record r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
Mode
i m u li
Cost nth l e
l i k a erab
H u cost
This
n s f entered
was
h i k as
- t r
400a EUR. Why is the
t
ar noncost different?
K
Running a Vessel Rate Query
Find Rates
Ship From Location ID DEBRV
Ship to Location ID USHOU
Ship Unit Count 1
Weight 15000 KG
Volume 1 CU FT
Click Save to right of Commodities grid.

Click Search
OTM should return your ACLU rate.
Enter the results of the rate query below:
Rate Offering ID
Rate Record
Mode
Cost
Running a Second Truckload Rate Query

s a
) ha
Find Rates
c om
a c le e
Ship From Location ID USHOU
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Ship to Location ID SACRAMENTO i m
th Stu
Transport Handling Unit LARGE BOX an
Ship Unit Count 1 h ulik e this
r t h ik LBo us
Weight
( k a se t
30000
Volume u tt ce1 nCU FT
Click th
i m l e li Save to right of Commodities grid.
l i k an erab
H u nsf
Click Search
rt h
OTM ikshould
n - tra your Coyote Carrier truckload rate.
return
Ka Enter ntheoresults of the rate query below:
Rate Offering ID
Rate Record
Mode
Cost

Solution Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates
You successfully ran rate queries for truckload and vessel rates.
Running a Truckload Rate Query

Rate Offering ID BIS9 TL

Rate Record ID BIS9 POL-DEU
Transport Mode TL
Cost Varies with exchange rate but roughly USD 394.28
This cost was entered User preferences tell OTM to display in USD.
as 400 EUR. Why is the
cost different?
s a
) ha
c om
Running a Vessel Rate Query
a c le e
Field
or Guid
Enter Your Results
@
Rate Offering ID ACLU VESSEL t
ut dent
Rate Record ID ACLU DEU-USA th i m tu
a n S
Mode VESSEL-CO
h ulik e this
Cost
r t h ik USD
665.00
o us
(ka nse t
t t
u lice
Running a Truckload t i m
h bQuery
Rate le
a n a
u lik sfer Field Enter Your Results
i k H RateraOffering
n ID COY9 TL
t h - t
Kar nonRate Record ID COY9 HOU-SAC
Mode TL
Cost 986.00 USD
Solution Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates

Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg
Itinerary
Viewing a Multi-leg Itinerary
2. Enter an Itinerary ID of POLAND.

4. Click the ID.
Note the Parameters tab. When you define a multi-leg itinerary in OTM, both the
Parameters tab and the Lane Definitions tab are similar to other itineraries. The
difference is in how you define the legs.
For direct, multi-stop, and multi-leg shipments, you define the source and destination at
the high level on the Parameters tab.
s a
) ha
For a multi-stop shipment, you also mark the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box.
5. Click the Lane Definitions tab.
c om
a c le e
For direct, multi-stop, and multi-leg shipments, you enter details on the source and
@ or Guid
destination locations based on data you entered previously in the Parameters tab. For
example, on the Parameters tab, you entered a source geo hierarchy of COUNTRY. On the
t
ut dent
Land Definition tab, OTM requires you to enter a source geography country code ID.
6. Click the List Legs tab. i m
th Stu
a n

details. h ulik e this
For direct and multi-stop shipments, you enter one leg defining equipment and mode
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
For multi-leg shipments, you define each leg of the shipment with associated
tt cen
information such as equipment, assignment type, sequence, and priority.
u
t h i m l e li
7. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the leg with a Sequence Number of 1.

l i k an erab
Note that this is the first leg; therefore, the Sequence Number is 1.

H u nsf
Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Optimize Equipment.
rt h ik n-tra
Note the Location Role of PORT.
Ka noNote the Location ID of DEBRV. In this example, the first leg ends at the port of
DEBRV.
Note the Mode Profile ID of TL.
Note the Equipment Group Profile ID is 40 OCEAN CONTAINER.
Note the Sequence Number is 2 because this is the second leg.
Note the Primary check box is marked. OTM applies order release constraints to
primary legs.
Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment.
Note the Location Role of PORT.
Note the Location ID of USHOU. In this example, the second leg ends at the port of
USHOU.
Note the Mode Profile ID. The mode for this leg is Vessel CO which stands for vessel
container.
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary

For the last leg to the final destination, the Sequence Number is 3.
Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment.
Note the Location Role and Location ID are blank. On the final leg, you do not need to
define a location role or location ID since this is specified as the destination location on
the Lane Definition tab.
Note the Mode Profile ID. The mode for this leg is TL.
After entering all leg information, the List Legs tab displays the leg ID, leg name,
sequence number, destination location, service provider profile ID, and mode profile ID.
s a
Note the Leg ID which is a unique identifier generated by OTM.
) ha
om
Note the Service Provider Profile ID. You can enter a service provider profile ID to
c
force OTM to use certain service provider(s) on the leg.
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary

Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary
Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary
OTM displays the Parameters tab.

3. Enter an Itinerary ID of POLAND CA MULTILEG.
5. Select the Itinerary Type of Active.
6. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of COUNTRY.
7. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE.
OTM displays the Lane Definitions tab.
s a
9. Enter the Source Geography Country Code ID of POL.
) ha
c om
11. Click List Legs.
a c le e
OTM displays the List Legs tab.
@ or Guid
12. Click New Leg. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Leg page. i m
th Stu
a n
13. Enter a Sequence Number of 1.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
14. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Optimize Equipment.
( k a se t
15. Select the Location Role of PORT.
tt cen
16. Enter a Location ID of DEBRV.
u
t h i m l e li
17. Select the Mode Profile ID of TL.
l i k an erab
18. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 40 OCEAN COMPATIBLE (already created).
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the first leg has been added to the page.
Ka no
20. Click New Leg.
OTM displays the Leg page.
22. Mark the Primary check box.
23. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment.
24. Select the Location Role of PORT.
25. Enter a Location ID of USHOU.
26. Select the Mode Profile ID of VESSEL-CO.
OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the second leg has been added to the page.
29. Click New Leg.
OTM displays the Leg page.
31. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment.

32. Select the Mode Profile ID of TL.
OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the final leg has been added to the page.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary
You successfully created a multi-leg itinerary with an ID of POLAND CA MULTILEG.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary

Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates

Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates
Running a Route and Rates Query

Find Rate and Route

Date Deliver By Todays date plus 3 months
Ship From Location ID WARSAW PLANT
Ship To Location ID SACRAMENTO
Ship Unit Count 1
s a
) ha
Weight 30000 LB
Volume 1 CU FT
c om
Click
a le e
Save to the far right of the Commoditiescgrid.
Click Search
@ or Guid
t
t ent
OTM should return your truckload, vessel, and truckload rate.mu
t i
h Stud
n
ikaEnter
Enter the results of the rate query below:
u l is Results
thYour
Field
h
ik o us e
r t h
ka nse t
Itinerary ID
Total Actual Costtt (
i m u lice
Which rate
n t h anble
has
u lika sfera
accessorial?
i k H (Click r n plus sign to

athe
t h - t
Kar nonexpand to show the
costs for each leg. Then
click the costs for each
leg to determine which
one has the accessorial)
How much is the
accessorial?
Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates

Solution Querying for Route and Rates
You successfully ran the query for rate and route.
Running a Rate Query

Itinerary ID POLAND CA MULTILEG

Total Actual Cost USD 2045.28
Which rate has an ACLU DEU-USA
accessorial?
How much is the USD 120.00
accessorial?
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Querying for Route and Rates

Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules
Viewing an Auto Assignment Rule
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Auto Assignment
Rule.
2. Enter an Auto Assignment Rule ID of SAC.

4. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Header tab of the Auto Assign Rule Manager.
Note the Stop after 1st Assignment check box. Mark the check box to have the rule
considered as complete as soon as it writes data. For example, you can create a rule
that automatically populates involved party data for any new order base based on
specific criteria (that you define on the Criteria tab).
s a
) ha
Note the Active check box.

om
Note the Run on Create check box. Mark the check box to specify that this rule will run
c
when the business object is created. If you leave the check box unmarked, the rule will
le e
c
run only on modification of the business object based on the event specified in the
a
Event field in the rule.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Note the Auto Assign Type ID that defines what data this rule assigns. In this example,
i m
th Stu
OTM assigns an involved party to a new order release. Refer to the OTM online help to
a n
see a full list of valid values for this field.
h ulik e this
Note the Pre Qual Criteria ID. You can optionally use this section to construct criteria to

h ik o us
eliminate a rule from being considered for processing.
r t

( k a se t
Note the Event field. You can map an agent to an auto assignment rule so that, if a
u tt cen
business object is changed, the auto assignment rule will run.
t h i m
5. Click the Criteria tab.
l e li
i k an erab
Note the Auto Assign Criteria ID. In this example, the involved party assignment is based
l
H u nsf
on the destination of the order release.
rt h ik n-tra
6. Click the Definition tab.
Ka no
This rule assigns the SAC_PLANNER as the LOGISTICS involved party when the
destination is SACRAMENTO.
Involved Party of SAC PLANNER
Communication Method of BY CONTACT
Involved Party Qualifier of LOGISTICS
Destination Location of SACRAMENTO
Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules

Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules
Creating an Auto Assignment Rule
You will set up an auto assignment rule that will look for the creation of an order release with a
destination location of Sacramento. The rule will add an involved party of SAC PLANNER to the
newly created order release.
1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Auto Assignment
Rule.
OTM displays the Auto Assignment Rule search tab.
3. Enter an Auto Assign Rule ID of SAC INV PTY.
4. Select the Auto Assign Type ID of ORDER_RELEASE_INVOLVED_PARTY.
s a
) ha
5. Click Criteria at the bottom of the page.
om
OTM displays the Criteria tab.
6. Select the Auto Assign Criteria ID of ORDER_DESTINATION. c
le e
a c
7. Click Save to the right of the Auto Assign Criteria ID field.
@ or Guid
8. Click Definition at the bottom of the page. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Definition tab. i m
th Stu
9. Enter a Seq of 1.
a n
10. Enter an Involved Party of SAC PLANNER.
h ulik e this
h ik o us
r t
( k a se t
12. Select an Involved Party Qualifier of LOGISTICS.
u tt cen
13. Enter a Destination Location of SACRAMENTO.
t h i m l e li
14. Click Save to the right of the Destination Location field.
l i k an erab
u nsf
15. Click Save to the right of the Involved Party Qualifier drop-down list.
H
rt h ik n-tra
a no
K 17. Answer the following:
What will happen when an
order release is created with
the destination of
SACRAMENTO?
Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

Solution Configuring Auto Assignment Rules
You successfully created an auto assignment rule with an ID of SAC INV PTY.
Creating an Auto Assignment Rule

What will happen when an OTM assigns SAC PLANNER as the logistics involved
order release is created with party to the order release.
the destination of
SACRAMENTO?
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases
Viewing an Order Release
2. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA.

4. Click the ID.
Note the Splittable check box. Mark the check box to allow splitting of the order. This
check box has priority over the Splittable check boxes on the Ship Unit tab. If not
marked, the order cannot be split at all. The Splittable check box is marked by default.
Note the Status button. Click Status to display the current status types and status
values that are assigned to the order release. You can create your own status types
and values that you can assign to an order release.
s a
) ha
Note the Priority. Enter a priority if you want to differentiate some order releases as a
high, medium or low priority for planning purposes. Valid values are 1-999. The higher
the number, the higher the priority.
c om
c le e
Note the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. This means the order release will be
a
based on line items.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Similar to an order base you must
i m
th Stu
have a source location and a destination location on your order release.
a n
ulik e this
5. Click the Ship Unit tab.
h
This tab displays the ship units on the order release by transport handling unit (THU) as
ik o us
t h
well as the distribution of packaged items on each THU.
r
a se t
6. Click the Line Item tab. (
tt cenk
u li
The Line Item tab displays each line item (packaged item) on the order and its
i m
t h l e
distribution on ship units based on the order configuration and the packaging attributes
i k an erab
of the item.
l
H u nsf
The line item summary page for an order release is different from an order base in that
rt h ik n-tra
each line item displays the ship units that contain the line item (indented beneath the
Ka no line item). You can manually enter ship units and their corresponding line items on an
order release or you can have OTM calculate the appropriate ship units based on the
number of line items and their attributes.
7. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the line item ID POL-CA-001.
This order release line item details page displays the attributes of an order release line
item. These are the general attributes for the line item and are not specific to any ship
unit.
Many of the attributes that appear here are the same as those that are available on an
order base.
Note the Packaged Item ID.
Note the Weight. You can enter your amount in any unit of measure but OTM displays
the amount according to your user preferences.
9. Click the Constraints tab.

OTM provides a variety of constraints that you can place on an order (order-level
constraints) or itinerary leg (leg-level) that help you control how orders are bundled and
how shipments are created for orders.
If you decide not to use these constraints (itinerary, rate, and service provider), OTMs
optimization engine determines the best choice during the shipment planning process.
The Constraints tab is where you would specify order level constraints such as:
Buy or sell fixed itinerary

Buy or sell rate offering
Equipment
Buy or sell service providers
Rate service
As well as, leg level constraints
s a
Note that OTM automatically added the involved party of SAC PLANNER because of the
) ha
auto assignment rule set up in the previous lesson.
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases
Reviewing the Business Monitor
1. Click Business Monitor at the top of the page.
2. Enter the results of the Business Monitor below.
At the conclusion of the exercise you will review the Business Monitor again to see which
queries have changed.
Saved Query Name Enter Your Results
ORDER BASE-NO RELEASES
ORDER RELEASE-NEW
SHIPMENT-NEW
SHIPMENT-DELAYED
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
4. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. t
ut dent
OTM displays the Order Release search tab. i m
th Stu
a n
OTM displays the Order Release tab. hu
lik this
i k u s e
6. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA. h
art sedate.
to
7. Enter an Early Pickup Date(k
u tt cen date plus 3 months.
of todays
Date oflitodays
8. Enter a Late Delivery
t i m
hConfiguration
le of ONE_TO_ONE.
9. Select an Order
a n a b
10. Enteru ik sLocation
alSource f er of WARSAW PLANT.
11. ik H r an Location of SACRAMENTO.
t h - t
Enter a Destination
r nonthe Reference Number Qualifier of PO.
Ka 12. Select
16. Click New Line Item near the middle of the page.
OTM displays the Line Item details page.
17. Enter a Packaged Item ID of SOCKS.
18. Enter a Weight of 4500 KG.
OTM returns to the Line Item tab with your new entry of SOCKS now in the section.
21. Enter a Packaged Item ID of T SHIRTS.

OTM returns to the Line Item tab with your new entry of T SHIRTS now in the section.
25. Enter a Packaged Item ID of SHORTS.

OTM returns to the Line Item tab with the three line items displayed.
29. From the confirmation page, click Edit.
Question Enter Your Answers s a
) ha
What involved party is on the
order release? c om
a c le e
How was this involved party
@ or Guid
assigned, since you did not t
ut dent
assign it when entering the
order? i
th Stum
a n
31. Click Business Monitor at the top of the page.
ulikWhich is query has been updated from
thsaved
this exercise? h
ik o us e
r
a se tt h
Field
t ( k n
Enter Your Results
Saved Query Name ut c e
m
hi ble l i
n t
li a sfeMonitor
32. Close thekBusiness
u ra page.
i k H ran
t
Karth non-

Solution Creating Order Releases
You successfully reviewed the OTM Business Monitor and created an order release with an ID
of POL-CA.
Reviewing Business Monitor

Saved Query Name Enter Your Results
ORDER BASE-NO RELEASES 1 (All of these values can vary if student has
deviated from the exercises in any way.)
Note: This is an order base in the
SHAREDCORE domain that will be used for a
demonstration later in the class.
ORDER RELEASE-NEW 0
SHIPMENT-NEW 0
s a
SHIPMENT-DELAYED 1 ) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
Question Enter Your t
utAnswers
n t
i m
h Stud e
What involved party is on the SAC PLANNER n t
order release?
u l ika this
How was this involved party i k
Auto hAssignment
u s e Rule
assigned, since you did not art h to
( k
tt cens
assign it when entering the e
order? u
im le li
t h
l i k an erab
H u nField s f Enter Your Results
i k r a
t Name
Karth Saved
n o n -Query ORDER_RELEASE-NEW
Solution Creating Order Releases

Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail
To audit data changes, you must:
Turn auditing on
Turn auditing on for each object you need
Subscribe to changes for those objects
Before you can audit any records, you must add at least one contact (per domain) using the
Communication Manager. The contact must be assigned the audit (AUD) communication
method. Then you can assign the contact to the specific OTM events you want to audit.
By default, any user in that domain that is assigned to the DEFAULT level can perform an audit.
The OTM Administrator can restrict audit access using the security services options.
All audit records are stored in the domain where the contact that has auditing privileges resides.
If your OTM installation has multiple domains or sub-domains, you can configure the audit
contact to store audit records in a specific domain so that you can audit other domains.
s a
Turning On Auditing ) ha
c om
Note: You must have the property glog.audit.beforeafter set to on to be able to see changes to
each database column. This is turned on for the training server.
a c le e
or Guid
1. Click Business Process Automation > Audit Trail Management > Audit Control.
@
2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. t
ut dent
3. Click the ID. i m
th Stu
a n

ulik e this
OTM displays the Audit Control page for your domain.
h

r t h ik o us
Here you turn auditing on in general and for specific business objects.
a se t
Select a Data Query Type to specify which business object you want to audit. In this
( k
tt cen
example, ORDER RELEASE is selected.
u
h
Creating an Audit tContact
i m l e li
l i k an Process
e r abAutomation > Communication Manager > Contacts.
4. Click Business
Hua Contact n f
sID of PLANNER.
5. k
i Enter
r a
-t at the bottom of the page.
Kar6.th Click
n o n
Search
7. Click the ID.
At the bottom of the page, note the Subject of ORDER MODIFIED. The audit trail will
be recorded whenever an order is modified.
In the Com Method ID field, note the entry of AUD for auditing.
Note the domain in the Domain Name field that determines where you want to store
audit records. This allows users in another domain to perform an audit on the records
from your current domain.
Viewing Audited Business Objects

You define which business objects to audit in the Notify Subject Manager.
In this example, you audit order bases when there is a modification.
Notification.
10. Enter a Contact Notification ID of ORDER - MODIFIED.

12. Click the ID.
OTM displays the Contact Notification manager for the Subject ID of ORDER
MODIFIED.
In the Contacts section, use contact notification to subscribe to the changes you want
to audit.
To audit rather than receive notification, use the Communication Method AUD.
In this example, you want to audit orders releases when there is a modification.
Viewing the Audit Information

Once you have set up auditing, you are able to see audit records in two locations:
Audit Trail Manager
Manger for the OTM business object you want to audit
For example, in the Order Release Manager, you could:
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
16. Click the ID.
@ or Guid
OTM displays the Order Release tab of the Order Manager. t
ut dent
i m
17. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Reference Number Qualifier of PO.
th Stu
18. Change the Reference Number to something else. a n
h ulik e this

t h
r ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
21. Mark the check box on the confirmation page.
l i k an erab
22. Click Actions > Order Management > View > Audit Trail.
u nsf
OTM displays the Audit Trail search tab.
H
rt h ik n-tra
Here you can limit your audit to a certain time window, a certain user, or certain action.
Ka no
24. Click any ID.
OTM displays the Audit Trail Entry page.
Here you can see the data that was changed, the user who changed the data, and the
time it was changed.
OTM can only populate the Reason section if you have configured OTM to require
users to enter a reason when changing data.
25. Close the Audit Trail Entry page.

Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment

Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments
Building Shipments
You build a multi-leg shipment from the order release you entered previously.
OTM displays the Order Release search tab.

4. Mark the check box next to your order release.
6. Click Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Direct.
OTM displays the Create Direct Shipment / Equipment Prompt page.
s a
7. Click OK without entering any information.
) ha
c om
8. Enter the shipment IDs, modes, and service providers.
a c le e
r
oProvider uid
Shipment ID Mode @
Service
t
ut dent G
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
9. Close the confirmation page. art
hik to us
t t (k nse
Mapping and Plotting m Shipmentslice
u
i
thManagementle > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments.
10. Click Shipment
a n a b
OTM u lik the
displays
s f er Shipment search tab.
Buy
11. ik H r an Release tab.
Click the tOrder
t h -
K nonan Order Release ID of POL-CA.
ar12. Enter
14. Mark the check boxes next to the three shipments just created.
15. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments.
OTM displays the map with all of your shipments. The multi-leg shipment you just created
has three shipments, with each shipment transporting the order from Warsaw, Poland, to
Sacramento, CA, USA. The order is moving truckload from Warsaw to Bremerhaven,
vessel to Houston, and truckload to Sacramento.
16. What color is the vessel movement?
Vessel Mode
17. What color are the TL movements?

TL Mode
18. Close the map page.

19. On the Buy Shipment results page, click Actions > Shipment Management > View > Plot
Related Shipments.
OTM displays the plot with all of your shipments.
20. Click Summaries > Cost by Service Provider.
21. How much does the Coyote Carrier (COY9) shipment cost?
Shipment Cost
s a
) ha
22. Close the Service Provider Facts page. c om
23. Close the Summaries menu. a c le e
24. Close the Related Shipment Plot page. @ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Solution Planning Multi-leg Shipments
OTM successfully built three shipments and you plotted the shipments.
Creating Shipments
Shipment ID Mode Service Provider
nnnnn TL BIS9
nnnnn VESSEL-CO ACLU
nnnnn TL COY9
Mapping and Plotting Shipments

s a
Vessel Mode grayish
) ha
c om
a c le e
Field or Guid
Enter Your Results
@
TL Mode green t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
ulik Enter is
thYour
Field
i k h s e Results
h u
Shipment Cost
( k art 986.00
e toUSD
u tt cens
t h im le li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Planning Multi-leg Shipments

Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements
Viewing Order Movements
When you built the multi-leg shipment in the previous practice, OTM automatically created order
movements. Lets review those order movements.
1. Go to Order Management > Order Movement > Order Movement.
OTM displays the Order Movement search page.

OTM displays the Order Movements results page.
Note that OTM created three order movements. One for each leg of the multi-stop
shipment: one for the first TL leg, one for the vessel leg and a third for the final TL leg.
4. Select all three order movements.
s a
) ha
5. Click View to view the order movements.
6. Lets review the first order movement which has an ID of POL-CA-001.
c om
le e
Note the Order Movement ID which is generated by the Business Number Generator
a c
and cannot be changed after the order movement is created.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Note the Perspective which identifies whether this is a buy (B) or sell (S) order
i m
movement. The perspective is determined by the perspective of the shipment or
th Stu
n
itinerary depending on how the order movement was created; for example, from an
a

order release or shipment.
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
Note the Creation Process Type which identifies whether the order movement was
ACTIONS). ( k a se t
created from an order release (SYSTEM-ITINERARY) or from a shipment (SYSTEM-
u tt cen

i m li
Note the Order Release ID and Shipment ID fields which display the order release from
t h l e
an erab
which this order movement was created and the shipment associated with this order
l i k
movement.
u nsf
H
ik n-tra
Note the Source and Destination Location ID fields. This specific order movement is
rt h from Warsaw to DEBRV, so it represents the first leg in this multi-stop movement.
Ka no Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date which were copied from the order
release.
Note Original Leg Position which is a relative position of the original leg to the primary
leg in the itinerary such that a primary leg's position is 0 and positions for legs to left of
the primary legs (pre-transport) are -1, -2, etc. Positions for legs after the primary leg
are 1, 2, etc. So in our scenario, the second leg of the itinerary, the vessel leg, was
marked as primary, so this first leg has an original leg position of -1.
The Total Weight, Total Volume, and Total Ship Unit Count fields are all calculated
from the ship units on the order movement.
7. Note the Constraints section.
This section gives you the opportunity to create/view/edit additional information about the
order movement, including equipment group information, service provider information,
rating, and transit time.
8. Note the Ship Units grid.
The Ship Unit ID is the shipment ship unit ID and it appears when the order movement is
planned on a shipment.

9. Click Next to view the second order movement.
10. Note the Order Movement ID of POL-CA-002.
11. Note the Original Leg Position of 0. This is set to 0 because this is the vessel leg which
was marked as the primary leg on the itinerary.
12. Note the Source and Destination Location IDs of DEBRV and USHOU. This order
movement represents the leg traveling from the port of Bremerhaven to the port of Houston.
13. Click Next to view the final order movement.

14. Note the Order Movement ID of POL-CA-003.
15. Note the Original Leg Position of 1.
16. Note the Source and Destination Location IDs of USHOU and SACRAMENTO. This
order movement represents the final leg traveling from the port of Houston to the
Sacramento, CA.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements
When you built the multi-leg shipment in the previous practice, OTM automatically created order
movements. Lets review those order movements.
Viewing Order Movements

1. Go to Order Management > Order Movement > Order Movement.

OTM displays the Order Movements results page.
4. Select all three order movements.
5. Click View to view the order movements.
6. Lets see what locations the first order movement is traveling between:
Field Value s a
Order Movement ID ) ha
c om
Source Location ID
a c le e
Destination Location ID
@ or Guid
7. Click Next at the top of the page. t
ut dent
8. Lets see what locations this second order movementth i m tubetween:
is traveling
a n S
Field Value
h ulik e this
Order Movement ID
r t h ik o us
Source Location ID ( k a se t
u tt cen
Destination Location
t h i m ID
l e li
Original k
l i anPosition
Leg
e r ab
Why n f
Huis theraoriginal
s leg
i kposition tset to 0?
Karth non-
10. Lets see what locations this order movement is going between:
Field Value
Order Movement ID
Source Location ID
Destination Location ID
Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements

Solution Viewing Order Movements
You successfully viewed the three order movement automatically created by OTM when you
planned your order release POL-CA into shipments.
For the first order movement:
Field Value
Order Movement ID POL-CA-001

Source Location ID WARSAW PLANT
Destination Location ID DEBRV
Lets see what locations this order movement is going between:
Field Value
Order Movement ID POL-CA-002
s a
Source Location ID DEBRV
) ha
Destination Location ID USHOU c om
a c le e
Original Leg Position 0
@ or Guid
Why is the original leg This is the order movement associated t
t ent
uthat
position set to 0? with the vessel movement iand
t m
h The t d is
leg
u
set to primary on the n itinerary. S order
l i k a with the
i s
movement associated
hu ualways h primary
e t has an original
i k
leg of the itinerary
th ofto0.
leg rposition
s
a
t (kmovement
Lets see what locations this torder
u e n seis going between:
Field
t h lic
im le Value
l i k
Order Movementan eIDrab POL-CA-003
H u nsf
h i kSource
- t r a ID
Location USHOU
t
K non Location ID SACRAMENTO
ar Destination
Solution Viewing Order Movements

Lesson 52: Network Routing
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Lesson 52: Network Routing

Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File
Viewing the System Log File
1. Click Order Management > Process Management.
You can access the log files from the Process Management page.
2. Under Logs, click System.

Note the From field. You can enter a date and time from which the log you want to
view log entries.
3. In the From field, change the time to 1 hour before the current time.
Note the Log drop-down list which contains the following options:
SYSTEM For logging system events.
WEB Controls web server logging. These settings control all aspects of web
logging including the filename, maximum size, backup count and enabled log IDs. If
s a
) ha
you modify Web settings via power data, all web servers are notified and retrieve
om
the modified settings on the next servlet use. You can create any number of web log
c
files. Each web log will be written to the web tier, and accessible via the System log
le e
c
viewer. If no Web log exists (or web properties suppress its use), web-tier logging
a
reverts to using properties.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
EXCEPTION Captures any problem that halts execution of an OTM action or
i m
th Stu
workflow. This log includes a trace of the error for technical support purposes.
a n
Note You may see other logs which are user logs. A user log is a custom log that
h ulik e this
captures log messages for a specific user. The name of this log varies depending on

h ik o us
what it is named when created. You should see the log Admin which is a custom
r t
log.
( k a se t
u
4. Select a Log of SYSTEM. tt cen

t h i m l e li
Note the Severities. If you do not select any severities, OTM finds all log entries
k an erab
regardless of severity. You can select one or more severities which include:
l i
H u nsf
Debug Logs debug messages, including their start and complete times. Note: Log
rt h ik n-tra
files that record debug messages may reduce your system performance. When
Ka no running a debug log, carefully select the business processes that it monitors.
Error Logs error messages for failed or otherwise stopped processes.
Explanation Logs explanation messages.
Performance Logs summarized performance information about selected business
processes.
Performance Detail Logs the start and stop times, and other details, of selected
business processes.
Warning Logs warning messages. Warnings occur prior to errors.
Note the IDs. Select one or more IDs of business processes to be logged. Refer to the
OTM online help to see a list of all log IDs.
Note Search For field. To find one or more specific log items, type characters in the
Search For field.
You can search for any log item (for example, a specific order ID, shipment ID, or time
stamp). Numbers, letters, and other characters can be entered.
Note the Ignore Case check box. Mark the Ignore Case check box to control case-
sensitive searches using the Search For field.

Note Top Level Process. The field shows an ID for the process that was performed. In
most cases, you should leave this field as is unless you are performing a search for a
specific process. Then, you would enter the appropriate ID.
5. Ensure the Entries per Page is set to 1000.
Note the Search All Backups check box. If you select the check box, OTM searches all
backup files in addition to the current log. To search the current log, do not select this
check box.
Note the Save to File check box. If you want to save the results as a file, select this
check box.
6. Click View Results at the bottom of the page. The Log Viewer opens.
Note the Time column. This column contains the exact date and time that this
corresponding system log entry was written to the log file. The time is pulled from the
OTM server and may differ from the time on your workstation.
Note the Process column. Each OTM process, such as, tendering, building a shipment,
s a
etc. is given a process ID by OTM. You can search on or look for a specific process ID
) ha
when troubleshooting.
c om
le e
Note the Severity column. When troubleshooting an issue, look for a severity of Error.
a c
or Guid
Note the ID column. When troubleshooting an issue, look for an ID of Exception.
@
t
ut dent
The ID column corresponds to the log file options that you can set when configuring a
i m
log file. IDs often used when troubleshooting including:
th Stu
Planning a n
RateEngine
h ulik e this
RateService
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
tt cen
Note the System Log column. The System Log column contains the actual log file
u
t h i m l e li
message or details of what OTM was doing. For example, an entry in the System Log
column of [INFEASIBLE] - No base cost calculated. [RACGrid2.costShipment()]
k an erab
shows that OTM could not find a base cost for a rate and therefore could not create a
l i
H u nsf
shipment.
r h ik n-tra
7. Scroll down to the bottom of the log page.
t
Ka no
8. Click Next.
OTM displays the next page in the log file.
9. Click Previous.
OTM displays the previous page in the log file.
10. Scroll down to the bottom of the log page.
11. Click Return returns to the System Log Entry Selection finder.
12. Close this page.
Viewing the Integration Log File

14. Under Logs, click Integration. The Integration Log Entry Selection page opens.
Note the From field. You can enter a date and time from which you want to view log
entries. For this demonstration, we will not change the date and time.
Note the Message Classes drop-down list which contains the following options. Note: If
no message classes are selected, all are included in the log.
I (Informational) - Describes an event.

W (Warning) - Describes the precondition to an error.
E (Error) - Describes a failure to complete processing.
Note the Search For field. To find one or more specific log items, enter data in the
Search For field. For example, you can search for a transmission number. Numbers,
letters, and other characters can be entered.

Note the Ignore Case check box. If needed, mark Ignore Case for your query.
Note the Entries per Page field. If needed, change the number entries per page to
appear in the log. 100 is the default.
15. Click View Results at the bottom of the page.
OTM displays the log file.
Note the Time column that displays when this entry occurred. The time is pulled from
the OTM server and may differ from the time on your workstation.
Note the other columns which include:
s a
) ha
Transmission
Transaction
c om
Written By
a c le e
Class
@ or Guid
Code t
ut dent
Integration Log i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
16. Click Return to return to the log selection page.
17. Close the page. h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File
Viewing the Setup of a User Log File
1. Click Configuration and Administration > Power Data > General > Log Files.
3. Click the ID containing ADMIN.

If you are creating a user log file, its log ID must match a system user name, without its
DOMAIN/SUBDOMAIN prefix. For example, if the user name is GUEST.ADMIN, the
log ID would be ADMIN.
In this example, the Domain Name to be monitored is COREDEMO.
4. Ensure that the Type of User is selected.
The following options are available in the Type drop-down list:
Ad Hoc - For logging selected business processes, such as integration and bulk a
s
) ha
planning.
System - For logging events throughout the system.
c om
le e
User - For logging the events pertaining to a specific user. If using this type, the ID
a c
must match a user, for example, Admin.
@ or Guid
Web - Controls web server logging. t
ut dent
i m
5. Verify that the On check box is marked. It is marked by default.
th Stu
This activates this log. a n
6. Note the Filename of coredemoadmin.log.
h ulik e this
t h ik o us
OTM saves your log entries to a file with this name. By default, OTM saves the log file to
r
<otm_install_dir>/logs/.
( k a se t
u tt cen
7. Ensure that the Append check box is marked. It is marked by default.
t h i m l e li
If you do not mark the Append check box, OTM deletes the log file at each new
i k an erab
session.
l
H u nsf
Note the entry of Max Size (in bytes) of 10000000. OTM starts a new log file when
rt h ik n-tra
reaching this limit.
Ka no Note the entry of Backups is 5. This indicates the number of backups of the file to be
saved. For example, if you specify three backups of files 10 MB in size, a total of 30
MB of log files will be saved. The default setting is 5.
Logging does affect performance. It is not recommended to increase the maximum
size. Rather than increase the size, you may want to increase the number of backups.
8. Scroll down to see a list of processes in the Log File Details section.
This section contains a list of Process IDs that you can configure for a log.
Refer to the OTM online help for a list of all Process IDs.
9. In the On list, select Agent.
10. Click the < Move Left icon to move the Process ID of Agents to the Off list.
This turns this type of logging off.
Viewing the Resulting User Log File

13. Under Logs, click System.

14. Change the From date to the day before today.
15. Select a Log of ADMIN.
16. Click View Results at the bottom of the page.
The data contained in a user log file is identical to what you saw earlier in the system log file
with one exception: you only see the log information for the specific domain name that this log is
attached to which, in this case, is COREDEMO.
When viewing log files, you can navigate between backup files. If you are viewing a particular
backup file (either via a search all backups or an explicit backup view), you can click Next at the
end of the file to move to the next backup file.
Logging for Oracle Technical Support
Default Logging Settings

Depending on the issue you have run into, you may need to provide additional information or
s a
) ha
enable different logging options. As a rule, Oracle Technical Support likes you to have the
following logging options enabled in the system log:
Agent c om
Planning a c le e
@ or Guid
Workflow
t
ut dent
WorkflowDetails
i m
th Stu
n
Note: Some logging options write a great deal of information to the logs and should be
a
h ulik e this
disabled unless you need to investigate a particular issue. This is especially true for Sql,
r t h ik o us
OrderBundlingDetails, PlanningDetails, RateEngineDebug, and RateEngineDetails.
Troubleshooting OTM What (to k t Logs

aTurn onsein the
u tt you careenworking in and the problem type, technical support will
Depending on the area of OTM
like to have differentth m
i options
logging l e li enabled. To see a list of logs to enable when while
k n My Oracle
asee r ab Support note # 387267.1.
l i
troubleshooting,
f e
i k Hu rans
t
Karth non-

Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary
To learn what tables contain foreign keys into other tables, you can look in the OTM Data
Dictionary. The OTM Data Dictionary contains all tables and their columns in the OTM
database. When OTM is installed, you can find the OTM Data Dictionary under
http:/servername/html/data_dict as detailed in the steps below.
The following steps are recommended so that the data dictionary opens in the online help
window instead of replacing the OTM window:

1. The easiest way to view the Data Dictionary it to first click the Help button at the top of the
OTM page.
2. In the Address bar of your browser, delete all text after html/ and type data_dict.
3. Press Enter to view the Data Dictionary.
4. Next, scroll down until you see the LOCATION_REMARK table link in the left-hand pane.
5. Click the LOCATION_REMARK table link.
s a
B. This frame shows ) ha
A. This frame shows all tables.
c om
details of one table at a

time.
a c le e
or notes. uid
D. There is an asterisk
next to primary keys.
t @
C. There are additional
ut dent G
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
E. This frame shows additional

notes as indicated by C.
The following text adds more detail about each of the callouts in the graphic above:

A. The table list frame on the left shows all of the tables in the OTM database
exactly as they are named in the database. The tables are listed in alphabetical
order in this frame.
B. The largest frame on the right side shows the details of one table at a time. To
view table details here, click on a table name link in the table list frame.
Table details include:

Table name
All rows in the table along with what type of data can be entered into that row.
There may be a brief listing of what type of data can or cannot be entered into
that row (e.g., VARCHAR, NUMBER, DATE).
For some row names, you will see a link proceeded by FK which stands for
foreign key. This indicates that this row is a foreign key to the table in the link.
Directly following the list of all rows, you may see a list titled Tables that FK into
s a
this one. Click on any link in this list to view the information on that table.
) ha
c om
C. If you see an I icon next to the field name, this means there is more information
a c le e
available about that field. Click the I icon to see the information in the bottom-most
frame on the page.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
D. All primary keys have an asterisk before the row name.
i m
E. The bottom-most frame lists any notes available for the selected table or row.
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
6. Close the OTM Data Dictionary page.
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data
Exporting CSV Data
To export OTM data in CSV format, you need to decide what to export, where to put the result,
and how to export.
1. Click Business Process Automation > Data Import/Export > CSV Export.
Using the default settings, OTM asks what you want to export.
2. Click the Export Object Type drop-down list to see the options.
You can export:
Export Table Exports one table at a time.
Export Table Set Exports all tables in a table set.
Export Query Results Exports all tables in a SQL query.
3. Select an Export Object Type of Export Table.
s a
4. Click the Output Destination drop-down list to see the options.
) ha
You can export to:
c om
Browser Exports data to your browser.
a c le e
Remote Instance Exports data to a remote OTM instance.
@ or Guid

t
ut dent
File On WebServer Exports data to a file on your OTM server.
i m
th Stu
5. Select an Output Destination of Browser.
a n

ulik e this
Note the Run Job in Background drop-down list. OTM processes your export in the
h
r t ik o us
background and emails you the result when it has finished processing. The values are
h
N for No and Y for Yes. The default is N.
( k a se t
tt cen
6. Click Run at the bottom of the page.
u
t h i m l e li
The next page is displayed. The fields on this page vary depending on your selections for
l i k an erab
the above fields. The various versions of this page are not reviewed in this class.
u nsf
7. Verify that the Command is xcsv which will export CSV files without any parent or child
H
rt h ik n-tra
data.
8. Select a Table Name of CORPORATION.
Ka no
The tableName drop-down list includes all tables in the OTM database from which you can
export data.
9. Verify that the Exclude Public drop-down list is set to Y for yes.
If set to N, OTM will also export any data found in the PUBLIC domain.
10. Enter a Where Clause of CORPORATION_GID = COREDEMO.BIG TEXAN TRUCKING.
This is a SQL where clause.
11. Click Run.
Note: Due to an issue with Internet Explorer 9, you may see incorrect results on the normal
OTM integration page. To work around this issue, complete step 9 below to see the
expected output.
12. Right-click and select View Source.
13. Select the contents (usually rows 16 through 19) of the output.
14. Right-click and select Copy.
15. Open Notepad.
16. Paste the content into Notepad.

17. Click File > Save As.
18. Select a Save as type of All Files.
19. Save the file locally as CORPORATION.CSV.
20. Close Notepad.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File
Exporting CSV Data
To export OTM data in CSV format, you need to decide what to export, where to put the result,
and how to export.
1. Click Business Process Automation > Data Import/Export > CSV Export.
2. Ensure that an Export Object Type value of Export Table is selected.

3. Ensure that an Output Destination value of Browser is selected.
5. Select a Table Name of CORPORATION.
6. Enter a Where Clause of CORPORATION_GID = CORE###.BIG TEXAN TRUCKING
where CORE### is your student domain name.
Note: You must type the Where Clause exactly as shown above. Be very careful about
s a
) ha
adding the spaces in the appropriate places. This is an SQL query and as a result it must
be exact. Also if you named the Corporation ID on your BBT9 Service Provider something
other than BIG TEXAN TRUCKING, you need to reflect that in your SQL query.
c om
c le e
Note: Do not copy and paste the Where Clause text from the PDF file. The copy and paste
a
or Guid
may bring in extra unwanted control characters which can cause the CSV export to fail.
@
7. Click Run at the bottom of the page. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
OTM integration page. To work around this issue, complete step 8 below to see the
expected output.
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
( k
9. Select the contents (usually rows 16 through 19) of the output.
tt cen
i m u
10. Right-click and select Copy.
li
t h l e
an erab
11. Open Notepad.
l i
u nsfk
12. Paste the content into Notepad.
H
ik n-tra
13. Click File > Save As.
rt h
a no
14. Select a Save as type of All Files.
K 15. Save the file locally as CORPORATION.CSV.
16. Close Notepad.
Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File

Solution Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File
You have successfully exported the CORPORATION.CSV file from OTM.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File

Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File
Edit the corporation CSV file so that it is a new and unique corporation that you can upload into
your OTM domain.
1. Open Notepad.
2. In Notepad, click File > Open.
Notepad displays the Open window.

3. Next to Files of type:, select All Files.
4. Navigate to location in which you saved the CORPORATION.CSV file. This is the file that
you created in the previous practice.
5. Double-click the CORPORATION.CSV file to open it.
Notepad displays the file.
6. Click Edit > Replace .
7. Enter a Find what of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING.
s a
8. Enter a Replace with of your SOUTHWEST TRUCKING. ) ha
Note: Remember to use only uppercase characters.
c om
9. Click Replace All.
a c le e
10. Click Cancel.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
11. Delete the date entry similar to "20140416193637" from the end of the line that starts with
CORE###.SOUTHWEST TRUCKING. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
Warning: Do not delete the last three commas (,) that appear on the line. They must remain
in the CSV file.
h
ik o us
12. Click File > Save.
r t
a se th
13. Close Notepad. (
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File

Solution Editing the Corporation CSV File
You successfully edited the CORPORATON.CSV file to include a new corporation.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution Editing the Corporation CSV File

Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File
This demonstration reviews how to upload a single CSV file into OTM using the Integration
Manager.
1. In OTM, click Business Process Automation > Integration > Integration Manager.
2. Click Upload an XML/CSV Transmission.
OTM displays the Upload an XML/CSV Transmission page.

3. Click Browse to the right of the What XML/CSV file do you want to upload? field.
4. Select a CSV file to upload. You can use the CORPORATION.CSV file that you created in
Guided Demonstration 2.
5. Click Upload.
OTM displays this page after you click Upload.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erafield,
b

H u ns
In the f
Command select the appropriate transaction code. The values include:
h i a CSV data into the database.

k i-trInserts
t
ar nonii Insert and ignore which inserts data, while suppressing unique key constraint
K violations.
u Updates data in the database.
uu Updates data, while suppressing no data found constraint violations.
d Deletes data from the database.
dd Deletes data, while suppressing no data found constraint violations.
iu Insert and update which attempts to insert data. If a record with this primary
key already exists, OTM updates the data.
rc Replace children which deletes all child data corresponding to the top level
parent, updates the top level parent, and inserts the new child data.
The Data Directory field is where OTM can find the file specified in the Data File
Name field.
This field will default to a temporary folder on the server where your CSV file is
uploaded to prior to updating the database.
The Data File Name field contains the name of the file that you recently selected to
upload in the Upload XML/CSV Transmission page.

If you select Run SQL Loader, OTM uses the Oracle sqlloader program to import the
CSV file instead of a java procedure.
If you have sqlloader installed on the web server, the sqlloader is faster than the
java procedure. However, this will only work if sqlloader is installed on the OTM web
server. The following line must be added to the jserv.properties file to make
sqlloader run from the web:
wrapper.path = d:/product/oracle/ora81/bin
This entry will differ depending on the location of the Oracle bin directory.
Xvalidate drop-down list allows you to turn on or off diagnostic messaging.
Y OTM gives you more diagnostics messages. This is the default.
N OTM turns off diagnostics messages.
Encoding is where you indicate the encoding of the file you import.
Common settings are ISO-8859-1 and UTF-8 (default). You especially need to
s a
) ha
consider this when you import data containing characters outside the 7-bit ASCII
set. Also, consider the encoding of your database.
c om
If your file contains standard ASCII characters, then it can be encoded as ISO-8859-
a c le e
1. If it contains non-standard, international characters, then it should be encoded as
UTF-8.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File
In this practice, you import the CORPORATION.CSV file that you created previously into OTM.
1. In OTM, click Business Process Automation > Integration > Integration Manager.
2. Click Upload an XML/CSV Transmission.
OTM displays the Upload an XML/CSV Transmission page.
3. Click Browse to the right of the What XML/CSV file do you want to upload? field.
4. Select the CORPORATION.CSV file that you edited in Practice 2.
5. Click Upload.
6. In the command drop-down list, select i for insert.
7. Leave all of the other fields on this page in their default settings.
OTM integration page. To work around this issue, complete step 9 below to see the s a
expected output. ) ha
c om
You should see a page with HTML text similar to the following.
a c le e
Note the ProcessCount which should be 1.
@ or Guid
u t
t ent
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
t i m
h Stud
n
ika this
- <CSVUtilServletHelper>
- <CSVUtil>
u l
<Command>i</Command>
i k h use
h
art se to
<DataDir>/opt/oracle123/temp/upload/</DataDir>
( k
<DataFileName>CORPORATION.CSV</DataFileName>
utt licen
<ExcludePublic>true</ExcludePublic>
- <ProcessCSV> im
n th able
<xvalidate>true</xvalidate>
a
H ulik nsfer
<DatabaseGlobalName>123456</DatabaseGlobalName>
<TableName>CORPORATION</TableName>
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no <ColumnList>CORPORATION_GID,CORPORATION_XID,CORPORATION_NAME,IS_
DOMAIN_MASTER,IS_SHIPPING_AGENTS_ACTIVE,IS_ALLOW_HOUSE_COLLECT,
MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_AMT,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_CURRENCY_GID,MAX_HOU
SE_COLLECT_AMT_BASE,PICKUP_ROUTING_SEQUENCE_GID,DROPOFF_ROUTIN
G_SEQUENCE_GID,DOMAIN_NAME,INSERT_USER,INSERT_DATE,UPDATE_USER,
UPDATE_DATE</ColumnList>
<sqlString>insert into CORPORATION (
CORPORATION_GID,CORPORATION_XID,CORPORATION_NAME,IS_DOMAIN_MA
STER,IS_SHIPPING_AGENTS_ACTIVE,IS_ALLOW_HOUSE_COLLECT,MAX_HOUSE
_COLLECT_AMT,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_CURRENCY_GID,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT
_AMT_BASE,PICKUP_ROUTING_SEQUENCE_GID,DROPOFF_ROUTING_SEQUENC
E_GID,DOMAIN_NAME,INSERT_USER,INSERT_DATE,UPDATE_USER,UPDATE_DA
TE) values (?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?)</sqlString>
<ProcessCount>1</ProcessCount>
<ErrorCount>0</ErrorCount>
<SkipCount>0</SkipCount>
</ProcessCSV>
</CSVUtil>
</CSVUtilServletHelper>
Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File

Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File
You successfully imported a new corporation into OTM using a CSV file.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File

Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM
Make sure the corporation in your CSV file now exists in OTM.
1. In OTM, click Shipment Management > Power Data.
2. Click Location > Corporations.
3. Enter a Corporation ID of SOUTH.

You should see the Corporations results page with an entry of CORE###.SOUTHWEST
TRUCKING.
5. Click the ID to view your new corporation.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM

Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM
You verified that the new corporation of SOUTHWEST TRUCKING exists in your domain.
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM

Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs

Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates

Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template
Copying a Static Trip Template
1. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Ground Schedule.
2. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP BASE.

4. Mark the check box.
5. Click Actions > Copy Ground Schedule.
6. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP STATIC.
Note the Schedule Type. The schedule type differentiates between the different
concepts of ground schedules in a rate service and trip templates. It is also here you
decide whether to create a static or a dynamic trip template.
Note the Frequency. All trip templates assume you work with a weekly schedule. You a
s
) ha
specify for what days of the week OTM should create trips based on your trip template.

om
Note the Service Provider ID. Each trip template is specific to one service provider.
c
le e
Note the Equipment Group ID. This controls what equipment group OTM should use
a c
when creating trips for this trip template.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
Note the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box. This controls whether OTM should
i m
allow you to move more weight, volume, and transport handling units to a trip than the
th Stu
n
equipment group allows. If OTM cannot fit your order release on a specific trip, OTM
a
ulik e this
tries a later trip.
7. Delete the Discontinue Date. h
ik o us
r t
a se th
Note that there is no Discontinue Date. OTM only uses trip templates that have an
active time window. (
tt cenk
i m u li
8. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop. You must specify at least two stops in
t h l e
l i k an erab
each trip template.

H u nsf
Note the Sequence Number and Stop Number. The sequence number is just a unique
rt h
ik n-tra
identifier while the stop number determines in what order OTM should use the stops.
a no
Note the Location ID. This is the location of this stop. Since this is a static trip template,
K OTM disregards any stop times on your location.
Note the Stop Requirement Type of MANDATORY. OTM can delete OPTIONAL stops
from a trip if no order release uses this location. OTM always keeps MANDATORY
stops on a trip even if the stop seems to be unnecessary.
Note the Allow Pickup check box, Max Pickup Weight, and Max Pickup Volume fields.
OTM uses pickup and delivery constraints to limit what order releases you can add to a
trip.
The equipment constraints you enter on the trip template level are independent of the
stop level constraints. For example, OTM uses both Allow Pickup and Allow Delivery
constraints even if you select the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box.
Note the Repetition Schedule Activity ID. For each stop, you must specify both an
ARRIVE and a DEPART time.
Note the Day Adjustment. If you generate a trip for December 1, a day adjustment of 1
means that the trip will arrive December 2.
Note the Hour Adjustment and Minute Adjustment. These define the time of day.

s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template
Creating a Dynamic Trip Template
Dynamic trip templates are similar to static trip templates so we will focus on what is different
compared to static trip templates.

3. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP DYNAMIC.
4. Select a Schedule Type of DYNAMIC TRIP.
5. Mark the checkboxes for Monday through Friday.
6. Enter a Service Provider ID of TT99.
7. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT DRY VAN.
Controls what equipment group OTM should use when creating trips for this trip
s a
) ha
template.
Note the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box.
c om
a c le e
Since a dynamic trip template specifies no stop times, OTM must estimate stop times for
or Guid
the trip. Depending on the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box, OTM can do one of the
@
following:
t
ut dent

i m
Feed max volume and max weight into the variable stop time calculation for each stop.
th Stu
(Worst case estimation)
a n

ulik e this
Divide the effective volume and effective weight on the equipment group with the
h
r t h ik o us
number of stops and feed those values into the variable stop time calculation for each
stop. (Average estimation)
( k a se t
tt cen
8. Enter a Start Time Adjustment of 7 H.
u
t h i m l e li
This is the start time for each trip. The adjustment is relative to midnight of each day the trip
l i k an erab
template starts. For example, to start each trip at 8:00AM, enter 0D 8H 0M. OTM will add
u nsf
the stop times on each stop location to derive stop times.
H
rt h ik n-tra
9. Click New Stop at the bottom of the page.
a no
K Note the Drive Time From Prev Stop. For each stop in your dynamic trip template, you
must specify the drive time between stops. OTM calculates the trip stop times as:
Location N Drive Time Location N+1
Depart Arrive time= Depart time=

time =depart time = arrive time +
at prev. stop + fixed stop time +
drive time variable stop time
Note that you control what weights and volumes OTM should use for the variable stop
time with the Ignore Equipment Constraints check box.
Marking the check box expands the stop times the most, a worst case scenario.

Clearing the check box expands the stop times with an average weight and
volume.
11. Enter a Stop Number of 1.
OTM hides the Drive Time From Prev Stop field. You leave the drive time empty for the
first stop, since you are not driving to your first stop.
Instead the depart time from your first stop is the Start Time Adjustment.
12. Enter a Location ID of JEWELPOOL.

13. Select a Stop Requirement Type of MANDATORY.
14. Mark Allow Pickup.
OTM uses pickup and delivery constraints to limit what order releases you can add to a
trip.
The equipment constraints you enter on the trip template level are independent of the
stop level constraints. For example, OTM uses both Allow Pickup and Allow Delivery
constraints even if you mark the Ignore Equipment Capacity checkbox. s a
15. Click Save at the bottom of the page. ) ha
c om
OTM displays the Ground Schedule Manager page with the new stop added.
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering
Creating an Itinerary for Trips
2. Enter an Itinerary ID of MI-MI TL.

5. Click Copy Itinerary at the top of the page.
6. Enter an Itinerary ID of TRIP ITINERARY.
7. Select an Itinerary Type of ACTIVE.
9. Click List Legs at the bottom of the page.
10. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the leg.
s a
Note the Rate Offering ID. As always, you need matching rates, to be able to execute ) ha
c om
your shipments or trips. Often you have only one rate that has been negotiated
a c le e
specifically for this milk run, so you can refer to it directly from your itinerary leg.
or Guid
Note the Equipment Assignment Type. Your trip template specifies what equipment
@
t
ut dent
OTM must use so you should select the option No Equipment.
i m
In the Compatibility section, note the Equipment Group Profile ID. Your trip template
th Stu
a n
specifies what equipment OTM must use. Still, this page requires you to enter
h ulik e this
something in the Equipment Group Profile ID.
r t h ik o us
11. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP STATIC in the Schedules section.
( k a se t
12. Click Save to the right of the Ground Schedule ID field.
u tt cen
Note the Ground Schedule ID. You must refer to at least one static or dynamic trip
h i m li
template here for OTM to find what trips to put your orders on.
t l e
k an erab
l i
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Viewing a Rate for Trips
17. Enter a Rate Offering ID of TT99.
19. Click the ID.
20. Click the TRIP link in the Rate Service ID field.
Even though this page requires you to specify a rate service on your rate offering, OTM
uses your trip template instead of your rate service to calculate your transit time.

Itinerary/Leg
Rate Offering
Rate Service
Trip Template
s a
) ha
Unused Transit Time
information
c om
a c
Trips le e
@ or Guid
21. Close the Rate Service page. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

Appendix C3: Working with Templates
s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Appendix C3: Working with Templates

Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips
Based on your trip template, you generate trips (empty shipments) for a certain time period.
These dates determine how many trips OTM creates:
Schedule Cutoff Time Displays how far into the future you have already generated trips for
the specified trip template.
Generating Start Time and Generating End Time Each time you run the Generate
Shipments action, you specify the date for your first trip and your last trip. You can specify
the time period as week number and year or as start date plus duration.
If your cutoff time is Then OTM

generates
Earlier than your generating time period Trips from your cutoff
Cutoff Generating Generating time to the end of your
s a
) ha
Time Start Time End Time generating time period
c om
Generating Time Period
a c le e
@ or Guid
In your generating time period t
ut dTrips n tfrom your cutoff
i m
h Stu time e
Generating Cutoff Time Generating
End Time n
a t to the end of your
generating time period
Start Time
l i k h i s
i k hu use t
r th Period to
Generating Time
a
u t t (k ense
t h im le time
Later than your generating lic period No new trips
k a n
Start Time ra
Generating b Generating
l i f e End Time
Cutoff Time
i k Hu rans
th always n t
-generates
KarOTM n o trips from the cutoff time no matter when you specify to start generating
trips. This ensures that you generate all trips for every week. This is true even if you delete trips
you have generated previously.
If you choose to work with start dates and durations, consider the time of day for your start date.
If the generating time period ends at a time of day that is before the last stop time on your trip
template, OTM does not generate a trip for that day. If you work with week numbers instead, the
time of day is always midnight.
Generating Trips
5. Click Actions > Generate Shipments.
OTM displays the Generate Shipments page.
6. Enter a From Date of next Monday.
7. Enter a To Date of next Friday.

8. Click Ok.
OTM displays the Generate Shipments page. This page shows the Ground Schedule ID
and Shipments Expected.
9. Click Continue.
OTM displays the Ground Schedule Results page.
10. Click Refresh until you see a time in the Process End Time field.
11. How many shipments were built? There should be 5.
12. Click the link for shipments built.
OTM displays the Shipments Built page.
13. Close the Shipments Built page.
14. Close the Ground Schedule Results page.
16. Click the General tab.
s a
) ha
c om
19. Note the first five shipments OTM generated and their estimated start time.
a c le e
Shipment ID Start Time
@ or Guid
t
ut denYork
t
010### (shipment ID 1)
i m
YYYY-MM-DD 05:00 AM America/New
th Stu York
010### (shipment ID 2) YYYY-MM-DD 05:00 a n
k thisAM America/New
010### (shipment ID 3) YYYY-MM-DD h uli05:00eAM America/New York
h i k u s
k rt e to 05:00 AM America/New York
aYYYY-MM-DD
(
tt YYYY-MM-DDns
m u l i c e 05:00 AM America/New York
n t hi ble
a for theerfirst
liklink a shipment.
20. Click the
u
H the Status s f
21. k
h i Click
- t r an button.
t
ar noNote n the OTM Status of RESERVATION_OPEN
K 22. Close the Statuses page.
24. Click the pencil icon next to the first stop to edit it.
Note the Planned Arrival Time and Planned Departure Time. These match what was
entered on the ground schedule.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases
1. Click Order Management > Order Release> Order Release.
2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIP.
3. Enter a Total Gross Weight of 10000 LB.

5. Mark the check boxes next to the Order Releases: TRIP1-001, TRIP2-001, TRIP3-001.
6. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan Buy.
7. Click OK.
8. Wait a few seconds.
9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page.
10. Note the following information.
s a
Question Answer ) ha
c om
Shipments Built 1
a c le e
Total Number of Stops 7
@ or Guid
Orders Planned 3 t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Service Provider ID TT99
a n
h ulik e this
11. Click the link in the Shipments Built field.
r t h ik o us
12. Click the Shipment ID.
( k a se t
13. Click Status on the right u t of the
tside e npage near the top.
m
hi values. l i c

a n t
Note the status
a b leOTM leaves the RESERVATION status as OPEN.
uthelikStops
14. Close the r
Statusesepage.
f
H an s
t h i kNote the-tfollowing
15. Click
r tab.
Kar non
16. information:
Location Arrive Time Depart Time
JEWELPOOL 5:00 5:10
CHAIN 6:30 6:35
CLASP 7:00 7:05
AMBER 7:35 7:40
JADE 8:10 8:15
OPAL 9:45 9:50
JEWELPOOL 10:20 10:25
17. Close the Buy Shipment page and bulk planning page.
Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases

Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips
Releasing the Trip
1. Click Order Management > Order Release> Order Release.
2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIP1.
3. Click Search.
4. Right-click on the ID TRIP1-001 and select Related Buy Shipments.
5. Mark the check box.
6. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Utilities > Release Schedule Instance.
OTM rates your trip, calculates shipment stop times, and removes unused, optional stops.
7. Close the Release Schedule Instance confirmation page.
8. Click the ID of the shipment.
9. Note the shipment ID.
s a
) ha
c om
OTM removes all stops marked as optional and have no pickup or delivery activity. For

c le e
a static trip template with only mandatory stops like this, there is no difference.
a
11. Click the Identification tab, the first tab.
@ or Guid
12. Click the Status button. t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
Note the status values. OTM sets the RESERVATION status to CLOSED.
a n
ulik e this
13. Close the statuses page.
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no
Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips

Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases to a Trip
Manually Assigning an Order Release to a Trip
2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIPEXTRA.

5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Move Order to
Existing Shipment.
OTM displays the Move Order to Shipment page.
6. Click the Select Shipment option.
7. Enter the Shipment ID that you noted previously.
8. Mark Consolidate Equipment.
s a
9. Click OK.
) ha
10. Click the ID.
c om
11. Scroll down to the Shipment Stops section.
a c le e
12. Click the plus sign next to stop number 2.
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
13. Note that a new ship unit TRIPEXTRA has been added to the shipment.
14. Close the Buy Shipment page. i m
th Stu
a n
ulik e this
15. Close the Order Move to Shipment page.
h
ik o us
r t
a se th
(
tt cenk
i m u li
t h l e
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no

s a
) ha
c om
a c le e
@ or Guid
t
ut dent
i m
th Stu
a n
h ulik e this
r t h ik o us
( k a se t
u tt cen
t h i m l e li
l i k an erab
H u nsf
rt h ik n-tra
Ka no


D81894GC10 Ag PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D81894GC10 Ag PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited Copyright 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliates

Restricted Rights Notice

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

OTM 6.3 Core Competence Activity Guide ....................................................................................................1-1

Lesson 1: Course Overview ...........................................................................................................................1-5

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Solution Viewing Order Statuses .............................................................................................................1-76

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles.........................................................................................1-132

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel ........................................................................................1-254

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File ............................................................................................1-318

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Before You Begin This Course

Before you begin this course, you should be able to:

How This Course Is Organized

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Architecture Guide Release 6.3

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Course Overview

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: OTM Terminology

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Navigating OTM

2. Go to the URL provided by the instructor.

t t (k nse logged into OTM as.

The main menu.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM

10. Click the Information link at the top right.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM

28. Close the OTM online help.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM

Note: The URL must be in the format of

3. Click Login. @ or Guid

8. Close the OTM Information page.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Logging into OTM

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Logging into OTM

Logging into OTM

Software Version Otmv631

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution Logging into OTM

and specific features of Help such as Flow Topics.

Copyright 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.